Q Logic Switch 59048 02 A User Guide
S i m p l i f y  
D
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
59048-02 A  
Page i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Section 1  
Introduction  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.3.1  
1.3.2  
1.3.3  
Intended Audience ............................................................................................. 1-1  
Related Materials ............................................................................................... 1-1  
Technical Support............................................................................................... 1-2  
Availability.................................................................................................. 1-2  
Training...................................................................................................... 1-2  
Contact Information ................................................................................... 1-2  
Section 2  
Using SANbox Manager  
2.1  
Installing SANbox Manager................................................................................ 2-1  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Windows Installation....................... 2-2  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Linux Installation............................. 2-3  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Solaris Installation .......................... 2-4  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Windows Installation ..................................... 2-5  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Linux Installation ........................................... 2-5  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Solaris Installation......................................... 2-5  
Starting SANbox Manager.................................................................................. 2-6  
Exiting SANbox Manager ................................................................................... 2-8  
Uninstalling SANbox Manager ........................................................................... 2-9  
Changing the SANbox Manager Default Fabric File Password........................ 2-10  
Saving and Opening SANbox Manager Fabric View Files............................... 2-10  
Setting SANbox Manager Preferences ............................................................ 2-11  
Using Online Help ............................................................................................ 2-12  
Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information ...................................... 2-12  
SANbox Manager User Interface ..................................................................... 2-12  
Menu Bar................................................................................................. 2-13  
Tool Bar ................................................................................................... 2-16  
Fabric Tree .............................................................................................. 2-17  
Graphic Window ...................................................................................... 2-18  
Data Window and Tabs............................................................................ 2-18  
Working Status Indicator.......................................................................... 2-18  
Using the Topology Display.............................................................................. 2-19  
Switch and Link Status ............................................................................ 2-19  
Working with Switches and Links ............................................................ 2-20  
Selecting Switches and Links......................................................... 2-20  
2.1.1  
2.1.2  
2.1.3  
2.1.4  
2.1.5  
2.1.6  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
2.10  
2.10.1  
2.10.2  
2.10.3  
2.10.4  
2.10.5  
2.10.6  
2.11  
2.11.1  
2.11.2  
2.11.2.1  
2.11.2.2  
Arranging Switches in the Display.................................................. 2-20  
59048-02 A  
Page iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
2.11.2.3  
2.12  
2.13  
2.13.1  
2.13.2  
2.13.3  
2.13.3.1  
2.13.3.2  
2.13.4  
Opening the Faceplate Display and Topology Popup Menus......... 2-21  
Topology Data Windows................................................................................... 2-21  
Using the Faceplate Display............................................................................. 2-22  
I/O Blades................................................................................................ 2-22  
Port Views and Status ............................................................................. 2-23  
Working with I/O Blades and Ports.......................................................... 2-23  
Selecting I/O Blades and Ports....................................................... 2-23  
Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu.............................................. 2-24  
Faceplate Data Windows......................................................................... 2-24  
Section 3  
Managing Fabrics  
3.1  
Security .............................................................................................................. 3-1  
User Authentication ................................................................................... 3-1  
Inter-Switch Link Security.......................................................................... 3-2  
Inband Management.................................................................................. 3-2  
Managing the Fabric Database .......................................................................... 3-3  
Adding a Fabric ......................................................................................... 3-3  
Removing a Fabric .................................................................................... 3-4  
Opening a Fabric View File ....................................................................... 3-4  
Saving a Fabric View File.......................................................................... 3-4  
Rediscovering a Fabric.............................................................................. 3-5  
Adding a New Switch to a Fabric............................................................... 3-5  
Replacing a Failed Switch ......................................................................... 3-6  
Deleting Switches and Links...................................................................... 3-7  
Displaying Fabric Information............................................................................. 3-7  
Fabric Status.............................................................................................. 3-7  
Displaying the Event Browser.................................................................... 3-9  
Filtering the Event Browser ............................................................ 3-11  
Sorting the Event Browser.............................................................. 3-12  
Save the Event Browser to a File ................................................... 3-12  
Active Zone Set Data Window................................................................. 3-12  
Zoning a Fabric ................................................................................................ 3-13  
Zoning Concepts ..................................................................................... 3-14  
Zones.............................................................................................. 3-14  
Aliases............................................................................................ 3-16  
Zone Sets ....................................................................................... 3-16  
Zoning Database ............................................................................ 3-16  
Zoning Configuration ...................................................................... 3-17  
Using the Zoning Config Dialog............................................................... 3-17  
FC-SW-2 Auto Save ....................................................................... 3-17  
3.1.1  
3.1.2  
3.1.3  
3.2  
3.2.1  
3.2.2  
3.2.3  
3.2.4  
3.2.5  
3.2.6  
3.2.7  
3.2.8  
3.3  
3.3.1  
3.3.2  
3.3.2.1  
3.3.2.2  
3.3.2.3  
3.3.3  
3.4  
3.4.1  
3.4.1.1  
3.4.1.2  
3.4.1.3  
3.4.1.4  
3.4.1.5  
3.4.2  
3.4.2.1  
Page iv  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
3.4.2.2  
3.4.3  
3.4.4  
3.4.4.1  
3.4.4.2  
3.4.5  
Default Visibility .............................................................................. 3-18  
Restoring Default Zoning......................................................................... 3-18  
Merging Fabrics and Zoning.................................................................... 3-18  
Zone Merge Failure ........................................................................ 3-19  
Zone Merge Failure Recovery........................................................ 3-19  
Using the Edit Zoning Window ................................................................ 3-20  
Managing Zone Sets ............................................................................... 3-22  
Creating a Zone Set ....................................................................... 3-22  
Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set.......................................... 3-23  
Copying a Zone to a Zone Set........................................................ 3-23  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets.............. 3-23  
Removing a Zone Set..................................................................... 3-24  
Removing All Zoning Definitions..................................................... 3-24  
Managing Zones...................................................................................... 3-25  
Creating a Zone in a Zone Set ....................................................... 3-25  
Adding Zone Members ................................................................... 3-26  
Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set .................................................... 3-27  
Removing a Zone Member ............................................................. 3-27  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set ................................................ 3-27  
Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets............................................. 3-27  
Changing Zone Types .................................................................... 3-28  
Managing Aliases .................................................................................... 3-28  
Creating an Alias ............................................................................ 3-28  
Adding a Member to an Alias ......................................................... 3-29  
Removing an Alias from All Zones ................................................. 3-29  
3.4.6  
3.4.6.1  
3.4.6.2  
3.4.6.3  
3.4.6.4  
3.4.6.5  
3.4.6.6  
3.4.7  
3.4.7.1  
3.4.7.2  
3.4.7.3  
3.4.7.4  
3.4.7.5  
3.4.7.6  
3.4.7.7  
3.4.8  
3.4.8.1  
3.4.8.2  
3.4.8.3  
Section 4  
Managing Switches  
4.1  
Managing User Accounts ................................................................................... 4-1  
Creating User Accounts............................................................................. 4-2  
Removing a User Account......................................................................... 4-3  
Changing a User Account Password......................................................... 4-4  
Displaying Switch Information ............................................................................ 4-5  
Name Server Data Window....................................................................... 4-6  
Switch Data Window.................................................................................. 4-6  
Link Data Window...................................................................................... 4-9  
Port Statistics Data Window ...................................................................... 4-9  
Port Information Data Window................................................................... 4-9  
Configured Zonesets Data Window......................................................... 4-10  
Configuring Alarms........................................................................................... 4-11  
Exporting Name Server Information to a File ................................................... 4-13  
4.1.1  
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
4.2  
4.2.1  
4.2.2  
4.2.3  
4.2.4  
4.2.5  
4.2.6  
4.3  
4.4  
59048-02 A  
Page v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
Paging a Switch................................................................................................ 4-13  
Setting the Date and Time................................................................................ 4-13  
Resetting a Switch............................................................................................ 4-13  
Configuring a Switch ........................................................................................ 4-14  
Switch Properties..................................................................................... 4-15  
Symbolic Name .............................................................................. 4-16  
Switch Administrative States........................................................... 4-16  
Domain ID and Domain ID Lock..................................................... 4-16  
Broadcast Support.......................................................................... 4-17  
Inband Management....................................................................... 4-17  
FC-SW-2 Compliance for Zoning.................................................... 4-17  
Legacy Port Address Format.......................................................... 4-18  
Timeout Values............................................................................... 4-18  
Network Properties.................................................................................. 4-19  
IP Configuration.............................................................................. 4-20  
SNMP Configuration....................................................................... 4-21  
SNMP Trap Configuration............................................................... 4-22  
Remote Logging ............................................................................. 4-22  
Archiving a Switch............................................................................................ 4-23  
Restoring a Switch ........................................................................................... 4-24  
Managing Firmware.......................................................................................... 4-26  
Installing Firmware .................................................................................. 4-26  
Activating the Pending Firmware............................................................. 4-27  
Changing the Pending Firmware............................................................. 4-27  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration .................................................... 4-27  
4.8.1  
4.8.1.1  
4.8.1.2  
4.8.1.3  
4.8.1.4  
4.8.1.5  
4.8.1.6  
4.8.1.7  
4.8.1.8  
4.8.2  
4.8.2.1  
4.8.2.2  
4.8.2.3  
4.8.2.4  
4.9  
4.10  
4.11  
4.11.1  
4.11.2  
4.11.3  
4.12  
Section 5  
Managing I/O Blades  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
Displaying I/O Blade Information........................................................................ 5-1  
Changing the I/O Blade Administrative State ..................................................... 5-2  
Testing an I/O Blade........................................................................................... 5-2  
Resetting an I/O Blade ....................................................................................... 5-3  
Hot Swap Wizard................................................................................................ 5-3  
Section 6  
Managing Ports  
6.1  
6.1.1  
6.1.1.1  
6.1.1.2  
6.1.1.3  
6.1.1.4  
Displaying Port Information ................................................................................ 6-1  
Monitoring Port Status ............................................................................... 6-2  
Displaying Port Modes...................................................................... 6-2  
Displaying Port Operational States................................................... 6-3  
Displaying Port Speeds .................................................................... 6-3  
Displaying Transceiver Media Status................................................ 6-4  
Page vi  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
6.1.2  
6.1.3  
6.1.4  
6.2  
6.2.1  
6.2.2  
6.2.3  
6.2.4  
6.2.5  
6.2.6  
6.2.7  
6.2.8  
6.3  
Port Statistics Data Window ...................................................................... 6-4  
Port Information Data Window................................................................... 6-7  
Name Server Data Window....................................................................... 6-8  
Configuring Ports................................................................................................ 6-9  
Changing Port Administrative States....................................................... 6-10  
Changing Port Speeds ............................................................................ 6-11  
Changing Port Modes.............................................................................. 6-11  
Changing Buffer-to-Buffer Credits ........................................................... 6-12  
I/O Stream Guard .................................................................................... 6-13  
Scan Device ............................................................................................ 6-13  
Extending Port Credits............................................................................. 6-13  
Resetting a Port....................................................................................... 6-14  
Testing Ports..................................................................................................... 6-15  
Appendix A Command Line Interface  
A.1  
A.2  
A.3  
Logging On to a Switch ......................................................................................A-1  
Command Syntax...............................................................................................A-2  
Commands.........................................................................................................A-3  
Admin Command.......................................................................................A-4  
Alias Command .........................................................................................A-5  
Config Command.......................................................................................A-7  
Date Command .......................................................................................A-11  
Fallback Command..................................................................................A-12  
Hardreset Command ...............................................................................A-13  
Help Command........................................................................................A-14  
History Command....................................................................................A-15  
Hotreset Command .................................................................................A-16  
Hotswap Command.................................................................................A-17  
Image Command.....................................................................................A-19  
Lip Command ..........................................................................................A-20  
Passwd Command ..................................................................................A-21  
Ping Command........................................................................................A-22  
Ps Command...........................................................................................A-23  
Quit Command ........................................................................................A-24  
Reset Command......................................................................................A-25  
Set Command..........................................................................................A-30  
Set Config Command ..............................................................................A-32  
Set Log Command...................................................................................A-42  
Set Port Command..................................................................................A-45  
Set Setup Command ...............................................................................A-46  
59048-02 A  
Page vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
Show Command......................................................................................A-50  
Show Config Command...........................................................................A-64  
Show Log Command...............................................................................A-67  
Show Perf Command ..............................................................................A-69  
Show Setup Command............................................................................A-71  
Shutdown Command...............................................................................A-74  
Test Command ........................................................................................A-75  
Uptime Command....................................................................................A-78  
User Command .......................................................................................A-79  
Whoami Command..................................................................................A-81  
Zone Command.......................................................................................A-82  
Zoneset Command..................................................................................A-86  
Zoning Command....................................................................................A-89  
Appendix B Graphing Port Performance  
B.1  
B.2  
B.3  
B.4  
B.5  
B.6  
B.7  
B.7.1  
B.7.2  
B.8  
Starting SANsurfer Fabric View..........................................................................B-2  
Exiting SANsurfer Fabric View ...........................................................................B-2  
Saving and Opening SANsurfer Fabric View Fabric View Files .........................B-3  
Changing the SANsurfer Fabric View Default Fabric File Password..................B-4  
Setting SANsurfer Fabric View Preferences ......................................................B-4  
Setting the Polling Frequency ............................................................................B-5  
Displaying Graphs..............................................................................................B-5  
Arranging Graphs in the Display................................................................B-6  
Customizing Graphs..................................................................................B-6  
Printing Graphs ..................................................................................................B-7  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File ........................................................................B-8  
B.9  
Glossary  
Index  
Figures  
Figure  
Page  
2-1  
2-2  
2-3  
2-4  
2-5  
2-6  
2-7  
2-8  
2-9  
Initial Startup Dialog....................................................................................................... 2-6  
SANbox Manager Window............................................................................................. 2-7  
Save Default Fabric File Dialog – SANbox Manager ..................................................... 2-8  
Load Default Fabric File Dialog – SANbox Manager ..................................................... 2-8  
Set New Password Dialog – SANbox Manager Fabric File ......................................... 2-10  
Preferences Dialog – SANbox Manager ...................................................................... 2-11  
SANbox Manager Display Elements............................................................................ 2-13  
SANbox Manager Menu Structure ............................................................................... 2-14  
Fabric Tree................................................................................................................... 2-17  
Page viii  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
2-10 Topology Display.......................................................................................................... 2-19  
2-11 Faceplate Display......................................................................................................... 2-22  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3  
4-4  
4-5  
4-6  
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
Add a New Fabric Dialog ............................................................................................... 3-3  
Events Browser..............................................................................................................3-9  
Filter Events Dialog...................................................................................................... 3-11  
Active Zone Set Data Window ..................................................................................... 3-13  
Zoning Config Dialog.................................................................................................... 3-18  
Edit Zoning Window ..................................................................................................... 3-21  
Account Administration – Add........................................................................................ 4-2  
Account Administration – Remove................................................................................. 4-3  
Account Administration – Change Password................................................................. 4-4  
Faceplate Display...........................................................................................................4-5  
Faceplate Display - Chassis LED Cluster ...................................................................... 4-6  
Configured Zonesets Data Window ............................................................................. 4-11  
Alarm Threshold Configuration Dialog ......................................................................... 4-12  
Alarm Threshold Example............................................................................................ 4-13  
Temperature Thresholds Dialog................................................................................... 4-15  
4-10 Switch Properties Dialog.............................................................................................. 4-17  
4-11 Network Properties Dialog ........................................................................................... 4-21  
4-12 Restore Dialogs – Full and Selective ........................................................................... 4-26  
5-1  
5-2  
5-3  
5-4  
B-1  
B-2  
B-3  
B-4  
B-5  
B-6  
Faceplate Display – Port Information............................................................................. 5-1  
Port Properties Dialog.................................................................................................... 5-9  
Designate Donor Ports................................................................................................. 5-14  
Port Loopback Test Dialog........................................................................................... 5-15  
Fabric View Graphs........................................................................................................B-1  
Save Default Fabric File – SANsurfer Fabric View ........................................................B-2  
Load Default Fabric File – SANsurfer Fabric View.........................................................B-3  
Set New Password – SANsurfer Fabric View Fabric File...............................................B-4  
Preferences – SANsurfer Fabric View ...........................................................................B-4  
Default Graph Options Dialog ........................................................................................B-6  
Tables  
Table  
Page  
2-1  
2-2  
2-3  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3  
4-4  
4-5  
4-6  
Management Workstation Requirements....................................................................... 2-1  
Menu Shortcut Keys..................................................................................................... 2-15  
Tool Bar Buttons .......................................................................................................... 2-16  
Topology Display Switch and Status Icons .................................................................... 3-8  
Severity Levels.............................................................................................................3-10  
Edit Zoning Window Tool Bar Buttons ......................................................................... 3-22  
Factory User Accounts................................................................................................... 4-1  
Name Server Data Window Entries ............................................................................... 4-7  
Switch Data Window Entries.......................................................................................... 4-8  
Switch Resets .............................................................................................................. 4-15  
Switch Administrative States........................................................................................ 4-18  
Timeout Values ............................................................................................................ 4-20  
59048-02 A  
Page ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
IP Configuration Parameters........................................................................................ 4-22  
SNMP Configuration Parameters................................................................................. 4-23  
SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters ........................................................................ 4-24  
4-10 Factory Default Configuration Settings ........................................................................ 4-30  
5-1  
5-2  
5-3  
5-4  
5-5  
5-6  
5-7  
5-8  
5-9  
A-1  
A-2  
A-3  
A-4  
A-5  
A-6  
A-7  
A-8  
A-9  
Port Modes..................................................................................................................... 5-2  
Port Operational States.................................................................................................. 5-3  
Port Speeds ................................................................................................................... 5-3  
Transceiver Media View................................................................................................. 5-4  
Port Statistics Data Window Entries............................................................................... 5-4  
Port Information Data Window Entries........................................................................... 5-7  
Port Administrative States............................................................................................ 5-10  
Port Speeds .................................................................................................................5-11  
Port Modes................................................................................................................... 5-12  
Command-Line Completion ...........................................................................................A-2  
Commands Listed by Authority Level.............................................................................A-3  
Switch Configuration Defaults......................................................................................A-23  
Port Configuration Defaults..........................................................................................A-23  
Alarm Threshold Configuration Defaults ......................................................................A-24  
Zoning Configuration Defaults......................................................................................A-25  
SNMP Configuration Defaults ......................................................................................A-25  
System Configuration Defaults.....................................................................................A-26  
Set Config Port Parameters .........................................................................................A-29  
A-10 Set Config Switch Parameters .....................................................................................A-31  
A-11 Set Config Threshold Parameters................................................................................A-33  
A-12 Set Config Zoning Parameters.....................................................................................A-34  
A-13 SNMP Configuration Settings ......................................................................................A-42  
A-14 System Configuration Settings.....................................................................................A-43  
A-15 Show Port Parameters.................................................................................................A-49  
Page x  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Introduction  
This manual describes the switch management tools which include the SANbox®  
Manager application (version 2.0) and the Command Line Interface (CLI) for the  
SANbox2®-64 Fibre Channel switch (firmware version 2.0). The SANbox  
Manager switch management application is the primary focus of this manual  
which is organized as follows:  
„
Section 1 describes the intended audience for this manual, related  
materials, and technical support.  
„
Section 2 describes how to use SANbox Manager, its menus, and its  
displays.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Section 3 describes fabric management tasks.  
Section 4 describes switch management tasks.  
Section 5 describes I/O blade management tasks.  
Section 6 describes port and device management tasks.  
Appendix A describes the Telnet command line interface.  
Appendix B describes the optional performance monitoring application,  
Fabric View.  
A glossary of terms and an index are also provided.  
1.1  
Intended Audience  
This manual introduces the switch management products and explains their  
installation and use. It is intended for users responsible for installing and using  
switch management tools.  
1.2  
Related Materials  
Refer to the following manuals for information about switch hardware and  
installation.  
„
SANbox2-64 Fibre Channel Switch Installation Guide, publication number  
59043-02.  
59048-02 A  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1 – Introduction  
Technical Support  
Q
1.3  
Technical Support  
Customers should contact their authorized maintenance provider for technical  
support of their QLogic switch products. QLogic-direct customers may contact  
QLogic Technical Support; others will be redirected to their authorized  
maintenance provider.  
Visit the QLogic support Web site listed in Contact Information for the latest  
firmware and software updates.  
1.3.1  
Availability  
QLogic Technical Support is available from 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Central Standard  
Time, Monday through Friday, excluding QLogic-observed holidays.  
1.3.2  
Training  
QLogic offers certification training for the technical professional for both the  
SANblade HBAs and the SANbox2 switches. From the training link at  
www.qlogic.com, you may choose Electronic-Based Training or schedule an  
intensive "hands-on" Certification course.  
Technical Certification courses include installation, maintenance and  
troubleshooting QLogic SAN products. Upon demonstrating knowledge using live  
equipment, QLogic awards a certificate identifying the student as a Certified  
Professional. The training professionals at QLogic may be reached by email at  
[email protected]  
1.3.3  
Contact Information  
Address:  
QLogic Corporation  
6321 Bury Drive  
Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55346-1739  
USA  
Telephone:  
Fax:  
+1 952-932-4040  
+1 952-932-4018  
Email:  
Technical Service  
[email protected]  
Technical Training  
[email protected]  
QLogic Web Site:  
www.qlogic.com  
Technical Support Web Site:  
http://support.qlogic.com  
1-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 2  
Using SANbox Manager  
This section describes how to use the SANbox Manager application and its  
menus. The following topics are covered:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Installing SANbox Manager  
Starting SANbox Manager  
Exiting SANbox Manager  
Changing the password for the default fabric view file  
Setting SANbox Manager user preferences  
Using online help  
SANbox Manager user interface  
Using the topology display  
Using the faceplate display  
2.1  
Installing SANbox Manager  
The SANbox Manager application requires a management workstation with the  
characteristics described in Figure 2-1.  
Table 2-1. Management Workstation Requirements  
„ Windows® NT, 2000, 95/98  
„ Linux® 7.2 Red Hat®  
„ Solaris™  
Operating System  
Memory  
128 MB or more  
Disk Space  
Processor  
150 MB per installation  
300 MHz or faster  
Hardware  
CD-ROM drive, RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 Ethernet port  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® or Netscape Navigator®  
Internet Browser  
59048-02 A  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Installing SANbox Manager  
Q
Your switch was shipped with either a SANsurfer Management Suite Disk or a  
SANbox2 Installation Disk. Refer to the following installation instructions that  
correspond to your situation:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Windows Installation  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Linux Installation  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Solaris Installation  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Windows Installation  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Linux Installation  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Solaris Installation  
2.1.1  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Windows Installation  
To install the SANbox Manager application on Windows from the SANsurfer®  
Management Suite Disk, do the following:  
1.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management  
Suite Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive. If the  
SANsurfer Management Suite start page does not open in your default  
browser, do the following:  
a.  
Using Windows Explorer, double-click the drive letter which contains  
the SANsurfer Management Suite Disk.  
b.  
Locate and double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open the SANsurfer  
Management Suite start page in your default browser.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, choose the SANbox  
Switch Software button.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox2 (2Gb) Series  
area.  
In the Windows column, choose the SANbox Manager link to open the File  
Download window.  
You have a choice of running the installation file from the CD-ROM or  
downloading the installation file to your hard drive. Choose one of the  
following:  
„
Open the installation file from the CD-ROM and follow the SANbox  
Manager installation instructions.  
„
Specify a location in which to save the  
sansurfer_windows_install.exe file, and choose the Save button.  
Double-click the saved sansurfer_windows_install.exe file and  
follow the SANbox Manager installation instructions.  
2-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Installing SANbox Manager  
Q
2.1.2  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Linux Installation  
To install the SANbox Manager application on Linux from the SANsurfer  
Management Suite Disk, do the following:  
1.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management  
Suite Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive. If a file browser  
dialog opens showing icons for the contents of the CD-ROM, double-click  
the Start_Here.htm file to open the SANsurfer Management Suite start  
page. If a file browser does not open, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the  
to open the browser. If there is no CD-ROM icon, do the following:  
a.  
b.  
Open an xterm or other terminal window.  
Mount the CD-ROM. From a shell prompt, enter the following  
command:  
mount /mnt/cdrom  
c.  
Execute your web browser to view the Start_Here.htm document  
using one of the following commands:  
$mozilla file:/mnt/cdrom/Start_Here.htm  
or  
$netscape file:/mnt/cdrom/Start_Here.htm  
d.  
The SANsurfer Management Suite start page opens in your default  
browser.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, choose the SANbox  
Switch Software button.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox2 (2Gb) Series  
area.  
In the Linux column, choose the SANbox Manager link to open the Save As  
dialog.  
Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_linux_install.bin file, and choose  
the Save button.  
Open a terminal window for the directory in which the  
sansurfer_linux_install.bin file was saved, and enter the following  
command and press the Enter key:  
chmod +x sansurfer_linux_install.bin  
Enter the following command:  
7.  
8.  
./sansurfer_linux_install.bin  
Press the Enter key, and follow the SANbox Manager installation  
instructions.  
59048-02 A  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Installing SANbox Manager  
Q
2.1.3  
SANsurfer Management Suite Disk - Solaris Installation  
To install the SANbox Manager application on Solaris from the SANsurfer  
Management Suite CD-ROM, do the following:  
1.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANsurfer Management  
Suite Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive. If the  
SANsurfer Management Suite start page does not open in your default  
browser, do the following:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Right-click the to open the Workshops Menu.  
Point to and select Files, then select File Manager.  
In File Manager, double-click the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click  
the Sansurfer folder.  
d.  
In the Sansurfer folder, double-click the Start_Here.htm file to open  
the SANsurfer Management Suite start page in your default browser.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
On the SANsurfer Management Suite start page, choose the SANbox  
Switch Software button.  
On the SANbox Switch Software page, scroll to the SANbox2 (2Gb) Series  
area.  
In the Solaris column, choose the SANbox Manager link to open the Save  
As dialog.  
Enter a path name to save the sansurfer_solaris_install.pkg file and  
choose the Save button.  
Open a terminal window for the directory in which the  
sansurfer_solaris_install.pkg file was saved, and enter the following  
command:  
chmod +x sansurfer_solaris_install.pkg  
7.  
Enter the following command and follow the SANbox Manager installation  
instructions.  
pkgadd -d QLGCsol_x.x.yyyy.mm.dd.xx.xx  
Note:  
If you download SANbox Manager from a server, be sure the  
downloaded file has execute permission before installing.  
2-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Installing SANbox Manager  
Q
2.1.4  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Windows Installation  
To install the SANbox Manager application on Windows from the SANbox2  
Installation Disk, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANbox2 Installation  
Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
Using Windows Explorer, double-click the drive letter which contains the  
SANbox2 Installation Disk.  
Double click the SANbox_Manager folder, then double click the Windows  
folder.  
Double click the executable file and follow the SANbox Manager installation  
instructions.  
2.1.5  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Linux Installation  
To install the SANbox Manager application on Linux from the SANbox2 Installation  
Disk, do the following:  
1.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANbox2 Installation  
Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the File Manager and double-click on the CD-ROM icon.  
Double click the SANbox_Manager folder, then double click the Linux folder.  
Double click the executable file and follow the SANbox Manager installation  
instructions.  
2.1.6  
SANbox2 Installation Disk - Solaris Installation  
To install the SANbox Manager application on Solaris from the SANbox2  
Installation Disk, do the following:  
1.  
Close all programs currently running, and insert the SANbox2 Installation  
Disk into the management workstation CD-ROM drive.  
2.  
Open a terminal window. If the disk isn’t already mounted, enter the  
following command:  
mount /mnt/cdrom  
3.  
4.  
Move the directory on the disk that contains the executable. Enter the  
following command:  
cd cdrom/cdrom0/sanbox~1/solaris  
Run the executable and follow the SANbox Manager installation instructions.  
Enter the following command:  
pkgadd -d sol_pkg  
59048-02 A  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Starting SANbox Manager  
Q
2.2  
Starting SANbox Manager  
To start the SANbox Manager application for the first time, choose one of the  
following methods:  
„
For a Windows platform, double-click the SANbox Manager shortcut, or  
select SANbox Manager from Start menu, depending on how you installed  
the SANbox Manager application. From a command line, you can enter the  
SANbox_Manager command:  
<install_directory>\SANbox_Manager\sanbox_manager.exe  
For a Linux platform, enter the SANbox_Manager command:  
/SANbox_Manager/SANbox_Manager  
„
„
For a Solaris platform, enter the SANbox_Manager command:  
/usr/opt/QLGCsol/bin/SANbox_Manager  
The application opens with the Initial Start dialog shown in Figure 2-1. If you prefer  
not to see this dialog, Check the Don’t show this dialog again box. This has the  
same effect as disabling the Display Initial Startup Dialog preference. Refer to  
”Setting SANbox Manager Preferences” on page 2-11 for information about  
setting preferences.  
Figure 2-1. Initial Startup Dialog  
2-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Starting SANbox Manager  
Q
„
„
„
Choose Open Existing Fabric to open the Add a New Fabric dialog, which  
prompts you for an fabric name, IP address, account name, and password.  
Refer to ”Adding a Fabric” on page 3-3.  
Choose Open Existing Fabric View File to open the Open View dialog  
which prompts you to specify a fabric view file that you saved earlier. Refer  
to ”Opening a Fabric View File” on page 3-4.  
Choose Start Application Without Specifying a Fabric to open the  
SANbox Manager window shown in Figure 2-2.  
Figure 2-2. SANbox Manager Window  
59048-02 A  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Exiting SANbox Manager  
Q
2.3  
Exiting SANbox Manager  
To exit a SANbox Manager application session, open the File menu and select  
Exit. If you have made changes to the view, the Save Default Fabric File dialog,  
shown in Figure 2-3, prompts you to save the view as the default fabric view file.  
You may also enter a password with which to protect the default fabric view file,  
but a password is not required. Refer to ”Changing the SANbox Manager Default  
Fabric File Password” on page 2-10 for information about changing this password.  
Choose one of the following:  
„
Enter a password in the Default File Password field or leave it blank and  
choose the Save View File button. This saves the current set of fabrics in  
the default fabric view file in the working directory.  
„
„
Choose the Exit Without Saving button to exit the application without  
saving the current fabrics to the default fabric view file.  
Choose the Cancel Exit button to cancel the exit operation.  
Figure 2-3. Save Default Fabric File Dialog – SANbox Manager  
In your next SANbox Manager session, the Load Default Fabric File dialog shown  
in Figure 2-4 prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to specify its  
password if there is one.  
Figure 2-4. Load Default Fabric File Dialog – SANbox Manager  
To prevent SANbox Manager from prompting you to load and save the default  
fabric view file between SANbox Manager sessions, set the View File Auto Save  
and Load preferences setting to Disable (Enable is the default). Refer to ”Setting  
SANbox Manager Preferences” on page 2-11 for more information.  
2-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Uninstalling SANbox Manager  
Q
2.4  
Uninstalling SANbox Manager  
A program to uninstall SANbox Manager was installed as part of the SANbox  
Manager installation process. The Uninstaller Data folder in the Install folder  
contains the uninstall program (Uninstall SANbox Manager). Also, a shortcut/link  
to the uninstall program was installed in the installation directory during the  
SANbox Manager installation process. The default installation directory is  
/QLogic_Corporation/SANbox_Manager.  
To uninstall the SANbox Manager application, do the following:  
„
For Windows, browse for the uninstall program file or the shortcut/link that  
points to the uninstall program file. The uninstall program shortcut is in the  
same folder as the program shortcut (Start menu, program group, on, or  
user specified) that is used to start the SANbox Manager application.  
Double-click the uninstall program file or shortcut/link, and follow the  
instructions to uninstall the SANbox Manager application.  
„
„
For Linux, execute the link to Uninstall_SANbox_Manager. If no links were  
created during the installation, enter the following command where  
INSTALL_DIR is the directory selected for installation:  
$INSTALL_DIR/UninstallerData/Uninstall_SANbox_Manager  
For Solaris, enter the following command and follow the instructions to  
uninstall the SANbox Manager application:  
pkgrm QLGCsol  
59048-02 A  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Changing the SANbox Manager Default Fabric File Password  
Q
2.5  
Changing the SANbox Manager Default Fabric File Password  
To change the password for the default fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Change Default File Password to open the  
Set New Password dialog as shown in Figure 2-5.  
Figure 2-5. Set New Password Dialog – SANbox Manager Fabric File  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Enter the new password in the Default File Password field.  
Re-enter the same password in the Re-enter Password to Confirm field.  
Choose the OK button to save the changes.  
2.6  
Saving and Opening SANbox Manager Fabric View Files  
In addition to the SANbox Manager default fabric view file, you can save and open  
your own fabric view files. To save a set of fabrics in a fabric view file, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric file or choose the Browse button to select an  
existing file. Files are saved in the working directory.  
3.  
Enter a password. When you attempt to open this fabric file, you will be  
prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password field blank, no  
password will be required.  
To open a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View  
dialog.  
2.  
Enter a name for the fabric file or choose the Browse button to select an  
existing file.  
2-10  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Setting SANbox Manager Preferences  
Q
2.7  
Setting SANbox Manager Preferences  
Using the preferences settings, you can:  
„
„
„
Change the location of the working directory in which to save files  
Change the location of the browser used to view the online help.  
Choose the fabric discovery interval. The fabric discovery interval is how  
often the SANbox Manager application receives information from the fabric.  
Choose 30, 45, or 60 seconds.  
„
„
Enable or disable the default view file auto save and load feature. Refer to  
”Exiting SANbox Manager” on page 2-8 for more information on the default  
fabric view file.  
Enable or disable the use of the Initial Start Dialog at the beginning of a  
SANbox Manager session. Refer to ”Starting SANbox Manager” on page 2-6  
for information about the Initial Start Dialog.  
„
„
Enable or disable the Event Browser. Refer to ”Displaying the Event  
Browser” on page 3-9.  
Choose the default port view when opening the faceplate display. You can  
set the faceplate to reflect the current port mode, port speed, port  
operational state, or port transceiver media. Refer to the corresponding  
subsection for more information:  
‰
‰
‰
‰
”Displaying Port Modes” on page 6-2  
”Displaying Port Operational States” on page 6-3  
”Displaying Port Speeds” on page 6-3  
”Displaying Transceiver Media Status” on page 6-4  
Figure 2-6. Preferences Dialog – SANbox Manager  
59048-02 A  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Using Online Help  
Q
To set preferences for your SANbox Manager sessions, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu, and select Preferences to open the Preferences  
dialog.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Enter or browse for paths to the working directory and browser.  
In the Application-wide Options area, choose the preferences you want.  
Choose the Apply button to save the changes.  
2.8  
Using Online Help  
Online help is available for the SANbox Manager application and its functions.  
The two ways to open the online help file are: open the Help menu and select  
Help Topics, or choose the Help button in the tool bar. You can also display  
context-sensitive help for all SANbox Manager dialogs by choosing the Help  
button in the dialog.  
2.9  
Viewing Software Version and Copyright Information  
To view SANbox Manager software version and copyright information, open the  
Help menu and select About....  
2.10  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
The SANbox Manager application uses two basic displays to manage the fabric  
and individual switches: the topology display and the faceplate display. The  
topology display shows all switches that are able to communicate and all  
connections between switches. The faceplate display shows the front of a single  
switch and its ports. Both displays share some common elements as shown in  
Figure 2-7.  
2-12  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
Q
Menu  
Bar  
Tool Bar  
Topology  
Display  
Data  
Window  
Data Window  
Tabs  
Working Status  
Indicator  
Faceplate  
Display  
Figure 2-7. SANbox Manager Display Elements  
2.10.1  
Menu Bar  
The Menu Bar presents the SANbox Manager menus as shown in Figure 2-8. The  
menus and the tasks offered in them vary depending on the display. For example,  
the Port menu and many of the Switch menu selections, shown in gray, appear  
only in the faceplate display.  
59048-02 A  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
Q
Switch  
File  
Fabric  
Delete  
Open View File...  
Save View As...  
Change Default File Password...  
Preferences...  
Add Fabric...  
Export Name Server  
Switch Properties...  
Network Properties...  
Archive...  
Remove Fabric  
Rediscover Fabric  
Start Fabric View  
Exit  
Restore...  
Load Firmware...  
Firmware Fallback...  
Set Date/Time...  
Hot Swap Wizard...  
Toggle Beacon  
Export Alarm Log...  
Configure Alarm Thresholds...  
Reset Switch  
Restore Factory Defaults  
Blade  
Port  
View  
Zoning  
Refresh  
Edit Zoning...  
Blade Properties  
Test Blade  
Reset Blade  
Port Properties...  
Extended Credits...  
Reset Port  
Layout Topology  
Toggle Auto Layout  
Remember Layout  
View Port Modes  
View Port States  
View Port Speeds  
View Port Media  
Edit Zoning Config...  
Activate Zone Set...  
Deactivate Zone Set  
Restore Default Zoning  
Port Loopback Test...  
Help  
Help Topics  
About...  
Figure 2-8. SANbox Manager Menu Structure  
In addition to the menu bar, both the topology and faceplate displays have context  
sensitive menus that pop up when you click in the graphic window with the right  
mouse button. Refer to ”Opening the Faceplate Display and Topology Popup  
Menus” on page 2-21 for more information about these popup menus.  
2-14  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
Q
Most menu selections have shortcut keys as shown in Table 2-2.  
Table 2-2. Menu Shortcut Keys  
Shortcut  
Selection  
File>Open View File  
Shortcut  
Selection  
Ctrl+O  
Alt+S+F  
Switch>Firmware Fallback  
Alt+F+O  
Alt+F+A File>Save As  
Alt+S+E  
Alt+S+S  
Switch>Reset Switch  
Alt+F+D File>Change Default File  
Password  
Switch>Restore Factory  
Defaults  
Alt+F+P File>Preferences  
Alt+F+X File>Exit  
Alt+P+R  
Alt+P+C  
Alt+P+N  
Alt+P+T  
Port>Port Properties  
Port>Ext Credit Wizard  
Port>Port Symbolic Name  
Port>Reset Port  
Alt+B+R Fabric>Remove Fabric  
Alt+B+D Fabric>Rediscover Fabric  
Alt+B+E Fabric>Show Event Browser Alt+P+L  
Alt+S+D Switch>Delete Alt+Z+E  
Alt+S+E Switch>Export Name Server Alt+Z+C  
Port>Port Loopback Test  
Zoning>Edit Zoning  
Zoning>Edit Zoning Config  
Zoning>Activate Zone Set  
Zoning>Deactivate Zone Set  
Zoning>Restore Default Zoning  
View>Refresh  
Alt+S+A Switch>Archive  
Alt+Z+A  
Alt+Z+D  
Alt+Z+R  
Alt+S+R Switch>Restore  
Alt+S+U Switch>User Accounts  
Alt+S+D Switch>Set Date/Time  
Alt+V+R  
F5  
Alt+S+H Switch>Temperature  
Thresholds  
Alt+S+W Switch>Switch Properties  
Alt+S+N Switch>Network Properties  
Alt+S+G Switch>Toggle Beacon  
Alt+S+C Switch>Configure Alarm  
Thresholds  
Alt+S+L  
Switch>Load Firmware  
Alt+S+V Switch>Activate Firmware  
59048-02 A  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
Q
2.10.2  
Tool Bar  
The tool bar consists of a row of graphical buttons that you can use to access  
SANbox Manager functions as shown in Table 2-3. The tool bar buttons are an  
alternative method to using the menu bar. The tool bar can be relocated in the  
display by clicking and dragging the handle at the left edge of the tool bar.  
Table 2-3. Tool Bar Buttons  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Add Fabric button - adds a new fabric.  
Open View File button - opens an existing fabric view file.  
Save View As button - saves the current fabric view to a file.  
Refresh button - updates the topology or faceplate display with  
current information.  
Events Browser button - opens the events browser.  
Help Topics button - opens the online help file.  
Edit Zoning button - opens the Edit Zoning dialog (available only in  
faceplate display).  
The QLogic logo opens a link to the QLogic web site.  
2-16  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
Q
2.10.3  
Fabric Tree  
The fabric tree lists the managed fabrics and their switches as shown in  
Figure 2-9. The window width can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the  
moveable window border. An entry handle located to the left of an entry in the tree  
indicates that the entry can be expanded. Click this handle or double-click the  
entry to expand or contract a fabric tree entry. A fabric entry expands to show its  
member switches.  
Fabric Entry  
Entry Handle  
Switch Entries  
Moveable  
Window Border  
Figure 2-9. Fabric Tree  
Each fabric tree entry has a small icon next to it that uses color to indicate  
operational status.  
„
A green icon indicates normal operation.  
„
A yellow icon indicates that a switch is operational, but may require attention  
to maintain maximum performance.  
„
„
A red icon indicates a potential failure.  
A blue icon indicates that a switch is unknown, unreachable, unmanageable,  
or a switch with security enabled when the fabric management switch has  
security disabled.  
The fabric tree provides access to the topology and faceplate displays for any  
fabric or switch.  
„
„
To open the topology display from the fabric tree, click a fabric entry.  
To open the faceplate display from the fabric tree, click a switch entry.  
59048-02 A  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
SANbox Manager User Interface  
Q
2.10.4  
Graphic Window  
The graphic window presents graphic information about fabrics and switches such  
as the fabric topology and the switch faceplate. The window length can be  
adjusted by clicking and dragging the window border that it shares with the data  
window.  
2.10.5  
Data Window and Tabs  
The data window presents a table of data and statistics associated with the  
selected tab. Use the scroll bar to browse through the data. The window length  
can be adjusted by clicking and dragging the border that it shares with the graphic  
window.  
Adjust the column width by moving the pointer over the column heading border  
shared by two columns until a right/left arrow graphic is displayed. Click and drag  
the arrow to the desired width.  
The data window tabs present options for the type of information to display in the  
data window. These options vary depending on the display.  
2.10.6  
Working Status Indicator  
The working status indicator, located in the lower right corner of SANbox Manager  
window, shows when the management workstation is exchanging information with  
the fabric. As conditions change, the fabric forwards this information to the  
management workstation where it is reflected in the various displays.  
2-18  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
Q
2.11  
Using the Topology Display  
The topology display shown in Figure 2-10 receives information from the selected  
fabric and displays its topology. Switches and inter-switch links (ISL) appear in the  
graphic window and use color to indicate status. Consider the following topology  
display features:  
„
„
„
Switch and link status  
Working with switches and links  
Topology data windows  
Figure 2-10. Topology Display  
2.11.1  
Switch and Link Status  
Switch icon shape and color provide information about the switch and its  
operational state. Lines represent links between switches. The topology display  
uses green to indicate normal operation, yellow to indicate operational with errors,  
red to indicate a potential failure, and blue to indicate unknown, unreachable, or  
unmanageable. Refer to ”Fabric Status” on page 3-7 for more information about  
topology display icons.  
59048-02 A  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Using the Topology Display  
Q
2.11.2  
Working with Switches and Links  
Switch and link icons are selectable and moveable, and serve as access points for  
other displays and menus. You select switches and links to display information  
about them, modify their configuration, or delete them from the display. The  
context-sensitive popup menus are accessible through the switch and link icons.  
2.11.2.1  
Selecting Switches and Links  
Selected switch icons are highlighted in blue. Selected ISLs are displayed as a  
heavier line. You can select switches and links in the following ways:  
„
„
„
To select a switch or a link, click the icon or link.  
To select multiple switches or links, hold down the Control key and select.  
To select all switches or links, right-click anywhere in the graphic window  
background. Select Select All Switches or Select All Links from the popup  
menu.  
To cancel a selection, press and hold the Control key, and select the item again.  
To cancel all selections, click in the graphic window background.  
2.11.2.2  
Arranging Switches in the Display  
You can arrange individual switch icons in the topology display or allow SANbox  
Manager to arrange all switch icons for you:  
„
To move an individual switch icon, click and drag the icon to another location  
in the graphic window. Links stretch or contract to remain connected.  
„
To arrange all switch icons in the topology display automatically, open the  
View menu and select Layout Topology.  
By default, the Toggle Auto Layout box in the View menu is checked which  
causes SANbox Manager to arrange the icons when you select Layout  
Topology.  
You can save a custom arrangement, or layout, and restore that layout during a  
SANbox Manager session. Begin by arranging the icons, then open the View  
menu and select Remember Layout. To restore the saved layout, open the View  
menu, uncheck the Toggle Auto Layout box, and select Layout Topology.  
2-20  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Topology Data Windows  
Q
2.11.2.3  
Opening the Faceplate Display and Topology Popup Menus  
The faceplate display shows the front of a single switch and its ports. To open the  
faceplate display when viewing the topology display, click the switch entry/icon in  
the fabric tree, or double-click the switch graphic.  
The Topology display also offers a fabric, switch, and a link popup menu:  
„
„
To open the fabric popup menu, right-click the graphic window background.  
The fabric popup menu presents selections to refresh the fabric, select all  
switches, select all links, or layout topology.  
To open the switch popup menu, right-click the switch icon in the graphic  
window. The switch popup menu presents selections to refresh the switch,  
delete the switch from the display, open the Switch Properties dialog, or  
open the Network Properties dialog.  
„
To open the link popup menu, right-click the link. The Link popup menu  
presents a selection to delete the link from the display.  
2.12  
Topology Data Windows  
The topology display provides the following data windows corresponding to the  
data window tabs:  
„
„
Name Server – displays all devices logged with the name server and their  
addresses within the current fabric configuration. Refer to ”Name Server  
Data Window” on page 4-6 for more information.  
Active Zoneset – displays the active zone set for the fabric including zones  
and their member ports. Refer to ”Active Zone Set Data Window” on page 3-  
12 for more information about this data window. Refer to ”Zoning a Fabric”  
on page 3-13 for information about zone sets and zones.  
„
„
Switch – displays current network and switch configuration data for the  
selected switches. Refer to ”Switch Data Window” on page 4-6 for more  
information.  
Link – displays information about the inter-switch links. Refer ”Link Data  
Window” on page 4-9 to for more information.  
59048-02 A  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
Q
2.13  
Using the Faceplate Display  
The faceplate display shown in Figure 2-11 displays the switch name and  
operational state, and port status. Consider the following functional elements of  
the faceplate display:  
„
„
„
„
I/O blades  
Port views and status  
Working with I/O blades and ports  
Faceplate data windows  
I/O Blades  
I/O Blade  
Status  
Empty Slots  
Figure 2-11. Faceplate Display  
2.13.1  
I/O Blades  
Figure 2-11 shows how slots appear in the faceplate display with and without  
installed I/O blades. I/O blade failure status is indicated by a status icon as shown  
in Figure 2-11. The SANbox2-64 switch numbers its slots from 0–10 from left to  
right. I/O blades occupy slots 1–4 and 6–9. Ports on an I/O blade are numbered  
from 0–7 from top to bottom in slot 1, 8–15 in slot 2, and so on to 56–63 in slot 9.  
The Blade Info data window assigns blade numbers 0–7 to slot numbers 1–4 and  
6–9.  
2-22  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
Q
2.13.2  
Port Views and Status  
Port color and text provides information about the port and its operational state.  
Green indicates active; gray indicates inactive. The faceplate display provides the  
following views of port status corresponding to the View menu options in the  
faceplate display. Refer to ”Monitoring Port Status” on page 6-2 for more  
information about these displays.  
„
„
„
„
Port mode  
Port state  
Port speed  
Port media  
2.13.3  
Working with I/O Blades and Ports  
I/O blades and ports are selectable and serve as access points for other displays  
and menus. You select I/O blades and ports to display information about them in  
their respective data windows or to modify them. Context sensitive popup menus  
and properties windows are accessible through the I/O blade and port icons.  
2.13.3.1  
Selecting I/O Blades and Ports  
You can select I/O blades and ports in the following ways. Selected blades are  
highlighted blue.  
„
To select an I/O blade or port, click the I/O blade or port in the faceplate  
display.  
„
To select a range of consecutive I/O blades or ports, select an I/O blade or  
port, then press and hold the shift key and select another. The application  
selects both end I/O blades or ports and those in between in sequence.  
„
„
To select several non-consecutive I/O blades or ports, hold the Control key  
while selecting.  
To select all I/O blades or ports, right-click anywhere in the graphic window.  
Select Select All Blades or Select All Ports from the popup menu.  
To cancel a selection, press and hold the Control key and select it again.  
59048-02 A  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2 – Using SANbox Manager  
Using the Faceplate Display  
Q
2.13.3.2  
Opening the Faceplate Popup Menu  
To open the popup menu, right-click anywhere in the graphic window to present  
the following tasks. If no blades or ports are selected, the corresponding tasks will  
be unavailable in the menu.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Refresh the switch  
Select all ports  
Manage switch properties  
Manage network properties  
Extended credits wizard  
Manage port properties  
Change the port symbolic name  
Run the port loopback tests  
Select all blades  
Manage blade properties  
To select one or more I/O blades or ports and open the Port popup menu, right-  
click an I/O blade or port.  
2.13.4  
Faceplate Data Windows  
The faceplate display provides the following data windows corresponding to the  
data window tabs:  
„
Name Server – displays all devices connected to the switch that are logged  
with the name server.  
„
„
„
„
„
Switch – displays current switch configuration data.  
Port Statistics – displays performance data for the selected ports.  
Port Information – displays information for the selected ports.  
Blade Information – displays information for the selected I/O blades.  
Configured Zonesets – displays all zone sets, zones, and zone membership  
in the zoning database.  
2-24  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 3  
Managing Fabrics  
This section describes the following tasks that manage fabrics:  
„
„
„
„
Security  
Managing the fabric database  
Displaying fabric information  
Zoning a fabric  
3.1  
Security  
The components of security are:  
„
„
„
User authentication  
Inter-switch link security  
Inband management  
3.1.1  
User Authentication  
User authentication means that the switch validates your account name and  
password when you attempt to add a fabric in SANbox Manager or to log in to a  
switch through Telnet. Your system administrator defines account names,  
passwords, the authority level, and expiration date.  
When logging in to a switch through Telnet, you must enter an account name and  
password to access the switch. SANbox Manager, however, does not require an  
account name and password to add a fabric unless fabric security is enabled. The  
switch comes from the factory with fabric security disabled. Fabric security is  
controlled by the SecurityEnabled parameter which is set by the Set Setup  
System command. Fabric security must be configured the same for all switches in  
the fabric. Refer to the ”Set Setup Command” on page A-46 for more information.  
When you add a fabric and fabric security is disabled, SANbox Manager ignores  
the account name and password entries and logs you in using the default account  
name and password (admin, password). This account name possesses Admin  
authority which grants full access to all tasks of the SANbox Manager menu  
system. If fabric security is enabled, you must enter an account name and  
password. The switch validates your account name and SANbox Manager grants  
access to its menus according to your authority level. If you do not have Admin  
authority, you are limited to monitoring tasks.  
59048-02 A  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Security  
Q
3.1.2  
Inter-Switch Link Security  
Inter-switch link security pertains to whether the switches in the fabric are  
configured to permit access to each switch in that fabric. Inter-switch link security  
enables inter-switch links with FC-SW-2 compliant switches, SANbox2 switches  
only, or none regardless of switch type. ISL security should be thought of as the  
parameter with Any, Ours and None being the values. The three ISLSecurity  
parameters are:  
„
„
„
Any - links with any FC-SW-2 compliant switch  
Ours - links only with another SANbox2 switch  
None - the port will not establish an ISL link  
Refer to the ”Set Config Command” on page A-32 for more ISL security  
information and a Set Config Port example.  
3.1.3  
Inband Management  
Inband management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links  
using SANbox Manager, SNMP, IPFC, management server, or the application  
programming interface. The switch comes from the factory with inband  
management enabled. If you disable inband management on a particular switch,  
you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct  
Ethernet or serial connection.  
To enable Inband Management using SANbox Manager, check the Enable radio  
button on the Switch Properties dialog. Refer to ”Switch Properties” on page 4-15  
for more information. To enable Inband Management using the command line  
interface, set the InbandEnabled parameter to True in the Set Config Switch  
command. Refer to the in the ”Set Config Command” on page A-32 for more ISL  
security information and a Set Config Port example.  
3-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
Q
3.2  
Managing the Fabric Database  
A fabric database contains the set of fabrics that you have added during a  
SANbox Manager session. Initially, the SANbox Manager application opens with  
an empty fabric database.  
3.2.1  
Adding a Fabric  
To add a fabric to the database, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric to open the Add a New Fabric  
dialog as shown in Figure 3-1.  
Figure 3-1. Add a New Fabric Dialog  
2.  
3.  
Enter a fabric name (optional) and the IP address of the switch through  
which to manage the fabric.  
Enter an account name and password. The factory account name and  
password are (admin, password). The password is for the switch and is  
stored in the switch firmware. If security is turned off (default), you are not  
required to enter an account name or password.  
„
Refer to ”User Authentication” on page 3-1 for information about user  
authentication.  
„
Refer to ”Managing User Accounts” on page 4-1 or the ”User  
Command” on page A-79 for information about creating user accounts.  
4.  
Choose the Add Fabric button.  
59048-02 A  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
Q
Note:  
A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins reserved as  
follows:  
„ 4 sessions for internal applications such as management  
server and SNMP  
„ 15 sessions for SANbox Manager inband and out-of-band  
logins, Application Programming Interface (API) inband and  
out-of-band logins, and Telnet logins. Of these 15, there can  
be a combined maximum of 10 SANbox Manager and API  
logins. Additional logins will be refused.  
3.2.2  
Removing a Fabric  
To delete a fabric file from the database, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a fabric in the fabric tree.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Remove Fabric.  
3.2.3  
Opening a Fabric View File  
To open an existing view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu, and select Open View File, or choose the Open  
button. If the fabric you are currently has changed, you will be prompted to  
save the changes to the view file before opening a different view file.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the Open View dialog, enter the name of the file to open.  
Enter a file password, if necessary.  
Choose the Load View File button. If the fabric has changed, you will be  
prompted to save before opening the new view.  
3.2.4  
Saving a Fabric View File  
To save a view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the File menu, and select Save View As.  
In the Save View dialog, enter a new file name.  
Enter a file password, if necessary.  
Choose the OK button.  
3-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
Q
3.2.5  
Rediscovering a Fabric  
After making changes to or deleting switches from a fabric view, it may be helpful  
to again view the actual fabric configuration. The rediscover fabric option clears  
out the current fabric information being displayed, and rediscovers all switch  
information. To rediscover a fabric, open the Fabric menu, and select Rediscover  
Fabric.  
3.2.6  
Adding a New Switch to a Fabric  
If there are no special conditions to be configured for the new switch, simply plug  
in the switch and the switch becomes functional with the default fabric  
configuration. The default fabric configuration settings are:  
„
„
„
Fabric zoning is sent to the switch from the fabric.  
All ports will be GL_Ports.  
The default IP address 10.0.0.1 is assigned to the switch without a gateway  
or boot protocol configured (RARP, BOOTP, and DHCP).  
If you are adding a new switch to a fabric and do not want to accept the default  
fabric configuration, do the following:  
1.  
If the switch is not new, reset the switch to the factory configuration before  
adding the switch to the fabric by selecting Restore Factory Defaults in the  
Switch menu.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to manage the switch through the Ethernet port, you must first  
configure the IP address using the Network Properties dialog.  
Configure any special switch settings. Consider configuring the Default  
Visibility setting to None in the Zoning Config dialog to prevent  
communication with other switches in the fabric until the new switch is  
configured.  
4.  
5.  
Plug in the inter-switch links (ISL), but do not connect the devices.  
Configure the port types for the new switch (GL_Port, TL_Port, Donor) using  
the Port Properties dialog.  
6.  
7.  
Connect the devices to the switch.  
Make any necessary zoning changes using the Edit Zoning window.  
59048-02 A  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Managing the Fabric Database  
Q
3.2.7  
Replacing a Failed Switch  
The archive/restore works for all switches. However, the Restore menu item is not  
available for the inband switches. You can only restore a switch out-of-band (the  
connection switch). Use the following procedure to replace a failed switch for  
which an archive is available.  
1.  
At the failed switch:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Turn off the power and disconnect the AC cords.  
Note port locations and remove the interconnection cables and SFPs.  
Remove the failed switch.  
2.  
At the replacement switch:  
a.  
b.  
Mount the switch in the location where the failed switch was removed.  
Install the SFPs using the same ports as were used on the failed  
switch.  
CAUTION!  
Do not reconnect inter-switch links, target devices, and  
initiator devices at this time. Doing so could invalidate  
the fabric zoning configuration.  
c.  
Attach the AC cords and power up the switch.  
3.  
4.  
Select the failed switch in the topology display. Open the Switch menu and  
select Delete.  
Restore the configuration from the failed switch to the replacement switch:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Open the faceplate display for the replacement switch. Open the  
Switch menu and select Restore.  
In the Restore dialog, enter the archive file from the failed switch or  
browse for the file.  
Choose the Restore button.  
5.  
6.  
Reconnect the inter-switch links, target devices, and initiator devices to the  
replacement switch using the same ports as were used on the failed switch.  
Reset the replacement switch to activate the configuration formerly  
possessed by the failed switch including the domain ID and the zoning  
database. Open the Switch menu and select Reset Switch.  
3-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Q
3.2.8  
Deleting Switches and Links  
The SANbox Manager application does not automatically delete switches or links  
that have failed or have been physically removed from the Fibre Channel network.  
In these cases, you can delete switches and links to bring the display up to date. If  
you delete a switch or a link that is still active, the SANbox Manager application  
will restore it automatically. You can also refresh the display. To delete a switch  
from the topology display, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more switches in the topology display.  
Open the Switch menu and select Delete.  
To delete a link, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more links in the topology display.  
Open the Switch menu and select Delete.  
3.3  
Displaying Fabric Information  
The topology display is your primary tool for monitoring a fabric. The graphics  
window of the topology display provides status information for switches, inter-  
switch links, and the Ethernet connection to the management workstation.  
The data window tabs show name server, switch, and active zone set information.  
The Active Zoneset tab shows the zone definitions for the active zone set. Refer  
to ”Name Server Data Window” on page 4-6 and ”Switch Data Window” on  
page 4-6 for information about the Name Server and Switch data windows.  
3.3.1  
Fabric Status  
The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in  
status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to  
update the display status, or you can refresh the display at any time. To refresh  
the topology display, do one of the following:  
„
„
„
„
Choose the Refresh button.  
Open the View menu and select Refresh.  
Press the F5 key.  
Right-click anywhere in the background of the topology display and select  
Refresh Fabric from the popup menu.  
59048-02 A  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Q
The topology display uses switch and status icons to provide status information  
about switches, inter-switch links, and the Ethernet connection. The switch status  
icons, displayed on the left side of a switch, vary in shape and color. Switches  
controlled by an Ethernet Internet Protocol have a colored Ethernet icon displayed  
on the right side of the switch. A green Ethernet icon indicates normal operation,  
yellow indicates a condition that may require attention to maintain maximum  
performance, and red indicates a potential failure. Table 3-1 shows the different  
switch icons and their meanings.  
Table 3-1. Topology Display Switch and Status Icons  
Switch Icon  
Description  
SANbox2-64 switch  
„ Normal operation (Green)  
„ Warning–operational with errors (Yellow)  
„ Critical–potential failure (Red)  
„ Unknown–communication status unknown,  
unreachable, or unmanageable (Blue)  
Fabric Management Switch  
„ Ethernet connection normal (Green)  
„ Ethernet connection warning (Yellow)  
„ Ethernet connection critical (Red)  
SANbox2-16 Fibre Channel switch  
SANbox2-8c Fibre Channel switch  
Non-QLogic Switch, or a QLogic Switch with different  
security than the fabric management switch.  
3-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Q
3.3.2  
Displaying the Event Browser  
The Event Browser is a compilation of messages that have been generated by the  
switches in the fabric in response to various events. The event format consists of  
a severity, time stamp, source, type, and description. The Event Browser shown in  
Figure 3-2, displays the event log and provides an opportunity to filter, sort, and  
export the contents to a file. To display the Event Browser, open the Fabric menu  
and select Show Event Browser or choose the Events button. If the Show  
Event Browser selection or the Events button is grayed-out, you must first  
enable the Events Browser preference. Refer to ”Setting SANbox Manager  
Preferences” on page 2-11.  
Column Sorting  
Buttons  
Severity  
Column  
Figure 3-2. Events Browser  
59048-02 A  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Q
Severity is indicated in the severity column using icons as described in Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2. Severity Levels  
Severity  
Description  
Icon  
Alarm – An event generated by the switch that specifically requests  
attention. Alarms are generated by several switch processes. Some  
alarms are configurable. Refer to ”Configuring Alarms” on page 4-11.  
Critical – An event that indicates a potential failure.  
Warning – An event that indicates errors or other conditions that may  
require attention to maintain maximum performance.  
Normal – An event that indicates a transition from a non-normal to  
normal operation.  
None  
Informative – An unclassified event that provides supporting  
information.  
3-10  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Q
3.3.2.1  
Filtering the Event Browser  
Filtering the Event Browser enables you to display only those events that are of  
interest based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, and description. To  
filter the Event Browser, open the Filter menu and select Filter Entries. This  
opens the Filter Events dialog shown in Figure 3-3. The Event Browser displays  
those events that meet the criteria in the Filter Events dialog.  
Figure 3-3. Filter Events Dialog  
You can filter the event browser in the following ways:  
„
„
„
Severity – Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes to display  
alarm events, critical events, warning events, normal events, or informative  
events.  
Date/Time – Check one or both of the From: and To: check boxes. Enter the  
bounding timestamps (MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss) to display only those events  
that fall within those times.  
Text – Check one or more of the corresponding check boxes and enter a text  
string for event source, type, and description. The Event Browser displays  
only those events that contain the specified text string in the Source, Type,  
or Description columns.  
59048-02 A  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Displaying Fabric Information  
Q
3.3.2.2  
Sorting the Event Browser  
Sorting the Event Browser enables you to display the events in alphanumeric  
order based on the event severity, timestamp, source, type, or description. Initially,  
the Event Browser is sorted in ascending order by timestamp. To sort the Event  
Browser, click the severity, Timestamp, Source, Type, or Description column  
buttons. You can also open the Sort menu and select By Severity, By  
Timestamp, By Source, By Type, or By Description. Successive sort  
operations of the same type alternate between ascending and descending order.  
3.3.2.3  
Save the Event Browser to a File  
To save the Event Browser to a file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Filter and sort the Event Browser to obtain the desired display.  
Open the File menu and select Save As.  
Select a folder and enter a file name in which to save the event log and  
choose the Save button. The file is saved in XML format and can be opened  
with an internet browser.  
3.3.3  
Active Zone Set Data Window  
The Active Zoneset data window displays the zone membership for the active  
zone set that resides on the fabric management switch. The active zone set is the  
same on all switches in the fabric – you can confirm this by adding a fabric  
through another switch and comparing Active Zone Set displays.  
To open the Active Zoneset data window, choose the Active Zoneset tab below  
the data window in the topology display. Refer to ”Configured Zonesets Data  
Window” on page 4-10 for information about the zone set definitions on a  
particular switch. Refer to ”Zoning a Fabric” on page 3-13 for more information  
about zone sets and zones.  
The Active Zoneset data window, shown in Figure 3-4, uses display conventions  
for expanding and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry  
handle located to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be  
expanded. Click this handle or double-click the following entries:  
„
„
„
A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.  
A zone entry expands to show its member port/devices.  
WWN and FC devices that are zoned, but no longer part of the fabric, are  
grayed-out.  
3-12  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
Active Zoneset  
Data Window  
Figure 3-4. Active Zone Set Data Window  
3.4  
Zoning a Fabric  
Zoning enables you to divide the ports and devices of the fabric into zones for  
more efficient and secure communication among functionally grouped nodes. This  
subsection addresses the following topics:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Zoning concepts  
Using the Zoning Config dialog  
Restoring default zoning  
Using the Edit Zoning window  
Merging fabrics and zoning  
Managing zone sets  
Managing zones  
Managing aliases  
59048-02 A  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.1  
Zoning Concepts  
The following zoning concepts provide some context for the zoning tasks  
described in this section:  
„
„
„
„
„
Zones  
Aliases  
Zone sets  
Zoning database  
Zoning configuration  
3.4.1.1  
Zones  
A zone is a named group of ports or devices that can communicate with each  
other. Membership in a zone can be defined by domain ID and port number,  
device Fibre Channel address, or device World Wide Name (WWN). Zone  
members can communicate only with members of the same zone.  
Three types of zones are supported. The following zone types define increasingly  
restrictive levels of communication.  
„
„
„
Soft zone  
Access Control List (ACL) - hard zone  
Virtual Private Fabric (VPF) - hard zone  
3.4.1.1.1  
Soft Zones  
Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling discovery. Members of  
the same soft zone automatically discover and communicate freely with all other  
members of the same zone. The soft zone boundary is not secure; traffic across  
soft zones can occur if addressed correctly. Soft zones that include members from  
multiple switches need not include the ports of the inter-switch links. Soft zone  
boundaries yield to ACL and VPF zone boundaries. Soft zones can overlap; that  
is, a port can be a member of more than one soft zone. Zone membership can be  
defined by Fibre Channel address, domain ID and port number, worldwide name,  
or a combination. Soft zoning supports all port modes.  
3-14  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.1.1.2  
Access Control List Hard Zones  
Access Control List (ACL) zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling  
discovery and inbound traffic. ACL zoning is a type of hard zoning that is  
hardware enforced. This type of zoning is useful for controlling access to certain  
devices without totally isolating them from the fabric. Members can communicate  
with each other and transmit outside the ACL zone, but cannot receive inbound  
traffic from outside the zone. The ACL zone boundary is secure against inbound  
traffic. ACL zones can overlap; that is, a port can be a member of more than one  
ACL zone. ACL zones that include members from multiple switches need not  
include the ports of the inter-switch links. ACL zone boundaries supersede soft  
zone boundaries, but yield to VPF zone boundaries. Membership can be defined  
only by domain ID and port number. ACL zoning supports all port modes except  
TL_Ports.  
3.4.1.1.3  
Virtual Private Fabric Hard Zones  
Virtual Private Fabric (VPF) zoning divides the fabric for purposes of controlling  
discovery and both inbound and outbound traffic. This type of zoning is useful for  
providing security and reserving paths between devices to guarantee bandwidth.  
VPF zoning is a type of hard zoning that is hardware enforced. Members can only  
transmit to and receive from members of the same VPF zone. The VPF zone  
boundary is secure against both inbound and outbound traffic. VPF zones that  
include members from multiple switches must include the ports of the inter-switch  
links. VPF zones cannot overlap; that is, a port can be a member of only one VPF  
zone. VPF zone boundaries supersede both soft and ACL zone boundaries.  
Membership can be defined only by domain ID and port number. VPF zoning  
supports all port modes.  
Note:  
Domain ID conflicts can result in automatic reassignment of switch  
domain IDs. These reassignments are not reflected in zones that use  
domain ID and port number pairs or Fibre Channel addresses to define  
their membership. Be sure to reconfigure zones that are affected by a  
domain ID change. To prevent zoning definitions from becoming invalid  
when the membership is defined by domain ID/port number or Fibre  
Channel address, you must lock domain IDs. Refer to ”Domain ID and  
Domain ID Lock” on page 4-16 and ”Set Config Command” on page A-  
32 for more information.  
59048-02 A  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.1.2  
Aliases  
To make it easier to add a group of ports or devices to one or more zones, you can  
create an alias. An alias is a named set of ports or devices that are grouped  
together for convenience. Unlike zones, aliases impose no communication  
restrictions between its members. You can add an alias to one or more zones.  
However, you cannot add a zone to an alias, nor can an alias be a member of  
another alias.  
3.4.1.3  
Zone Sets  
A zone set is a named group of zones. A zone can be a member of more than one  
zone set. All zones that are not members of a zone set belong to the orphan zone  
set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. Each switch in the fabric  
maintains its own zoning database containing one or more zone sets. This zoning  
database resides in non-volatile or permanent memory and is therefore retained  
after a reset. Refer to ”Configured Zonesets Data Window” on page 4-10 for  
information about displaying the zoning database.  
To apply zoning to a fabric, choose a zone set and activate it. When you activate a  
zone set, the switch distributes that zone set and its zones, excluding aliases, to  
every switch in the fabric. This zone set is known as the active zone set. Refer to  
”Active Zone Set Data Window” on page 3-13 for information about displaying the  
active zone set.  
3.4.1.4  
Zoning Database  
Each switch has its own zoning database. The zoning database is made up of all  
aliases, zones, and zone sets that have been created on the switch or received  
from other switches. The switch maintains two copies of the zoning database: one  
copy is maintained in temporary memory for editing purposes; the second copy is  
maintained in permanent memory. Zoning database edits are made on an  
individual switch basis and are not propagated to other switches in the fabric when  
saved. The zoning limits for a fabric are as follows:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Maximum number of zonesets is 256  
Maximum number of zones per zone set is 256  
Maximum total number of zones is 1000  
Maximum number of aliases is 256  
Maximum number of members per zone is 2000  
Maximum number of members per alias is 2000  
Maximum total number of zone and alias members is 2000  
3-16  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.1.5  
Zoning Configuration  
You can set the FC-SW-2 Auto Save and Default Visibility zoning configuration  
parameters using SANbox Manager or the Set Config Zoning command. The Auto  
Save parameter determines whether changes to the active zone set that a switch  
receives from other switches in the fabric will be saved to permanent memory on  
that switch. The Default Visibility parameter permits or prohibits communication  
among ports/devices when there is no active zone set. Refer to ”Using the Zoning  
Config Dialog” on page 3-17 for information about zoning configuration using  
SANbox Manager. Refer also to the ”Set Config Command” on page A-32 for  
information about zoning configuration using the CLI.  
3.4.2  
Using the Zoning Config Dialog  
Use the Zoning Config dialog to change the Auto Save and Default Visibility  
configuration parameters. In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and  
select Edit Zoning Config to open the Zoning Config dialog shown in  
Figure 3-5. After making changes, choose the OK button to put the new values  
into effect.  
Figure 3-5. Zoning Config Dialog  
3.4.2.1  
FC-SW-2 Auto Save  
The FC-SW-2 Auto Save parameter determines whether changes to the active  
zone set that a switch receives from other switches in the fabric will be saved to  
permanent memory on that switch. Changes are saved when an updated zone set  
is activated. Zoning changes are always saved to temporary memory. However, if  
Auto Save is enabled, the switch firmware saves changes to the active zone set in  
both temporary and permanent memory. If Auto Save is disabled, changes to the  
active zone set are stored only in temporary memory which is cleared when the  
switch is reset.  
59048-02 A  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.2.2  
Default Visibility  
Default visibility determines the level of communication that is permitted among  
ports/devices when there is no active zone set. The default visibility parameter  
can be set differently on each switch. When default visibility is enabled (ALL) on a  
switch, all ports/devices on the switch can communicate with all ports/devices on  
switches that also have default visibility enabled. When Default Visibility is  
disabled (NONE), none of the ports/devices on that switch can communicate with  
any other port/device in the fabric.  
3.4.3  
Restoring Default Zoning  
Restoring the default zoning clears the switch of all zoning definitions.  
CAUTION! This command will deactivate the active zone set.  
To restore the default zoning for a switch:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Restore Default  
Zoning.  
2.  
Choose the OK button to confirm that you want to restore default zoning and  
save changes to the zoning database.  
3.4.4  
Merging Fabrics and Zoning  
If you join two fabrics with an inter-switch link, the active zone sets from the two  
fabrics attempt to merge. The fabrics may consist of a single switch or many  
switches already connected together. The switches in the two fabrics attempt to  
create a new active zone set containing the union of each fabric's active zone set.  
The propagation of zoning information only affects the active zone set, not the  
configured zone sets.  
3-18  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.4.1  
Zone Merge Failure  
If a zone merge is unsuccessful, the inter-switch links between the fabrics will  
isolate due to a zone merge failure, which will generate an alarm. The reason for  
the E_Port isolation can also be determined by viewing the port information. Refer  
to ”Port Information Data Window” on page 6-7 and the ”Show Command” on  
page A-50 (Port keyword).  
A zone merge will fail if the two active zone sets have member zones with  
identical names that differ in membership or type. For example, consider Fabric A  
and Fabric B each with a soft zone named “ZN1” in its active zone set. Fabric A  
"ZN1" contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 1; Fabric B “ZN1”  
contains a member specified by Domain ID 1 and Port 2. In this case, the merge  
will fail because the two zones have the same name, but different membership.  
The zone merge will also fail if Fabric A “ZN1” is a soft zone and the Fabric B  
“ZN1” is an ACL zone.  
3.4.4.2  
Zone Merge Failure Recovery  
When a zone merge failure occurs, the conflict that caused the failure must be  
resolved. You can correct a failure due to a zone conflict by deactivating one of  
the active zone sets or by editing the conflicting zones so that their membership  
and zone type (soft, ACL, VPF) are the same. You can deactivate the active zone  
set on one fabric if the active zone set on the other fabric accurately defines your  
zoning needs. If not, you must edit the zone memberships, and reactivate the  
zone sets. After correcting the zone membership, reset the isolated ports to allow  
the fabrics to join.  
Note:  
If you deactivate the active zone set in one fabric and the Auto Save  
parameter is enabled, the active zone set from the second fabric will  
propagate to the first fabric and replace all zones with matching names  
in the configured zone sets.  
Refer to ”Managing Zones” on page 3-25 for information about adding and  
removing zone members. Refer to ”Resetting a Port” on page 6-14 for information  
about resetting a port.  
59048-02 A  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.5  
Using the Edit Zoning Window  
To edit the zoning database for a particular switch, open the Zoning menu from  
the faceplate display and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning window  
shown in Figure 3-6. Changes can only be made to inactive zone sets, which are  
stored in flash (non-volatile) memory and retained after resetting a switch.  
The Edit Zoning window has a Zone Sets tree on the left and a Port/Device (or  
members) tree on the right. Both trees use display conventions similar to the  
fabric tree for expanding and contracting zone sets, zones, and ports. An  
expanded port shows the port Fibre Channel address; an expanded address  
shows the port worldwide name. You can select zone sets, zones, and ports in the  
following ways:  
„
„
Click a zone, zone set, or port icon.  
Right-click to select a zone set or zone, and open the corresponding popup  
menu.  
„
„
Hold down the Shift key while clicking several consecutive icons.  
Hold down the Control key while clicking several non-consecutive icons.  
Zone Sets  
Tree  
Port/Device  
Tree  
Figure 3-6. Edit Zoning Window  
After defining zoning changes, choose the OK button to implement those changes  
and exit the Edit Zoning window. Choose the Apply button to save changes  
3-20  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
without closing the Edit Zoning window. Before zoning changes are implemented,  
SANbox Manager checks for and reports the following zoning conflicts:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Empty zone sets  
Empty zones  
Empty aliases  
ACL or VPF zones with non-domain ID/port number membership  
VPF zones that share port/device members  
Members in the same ACL zone that are segmented by VPF zoning.  
Using tool bar buttons, popup menus, or a drag-and-drop method, you can create  
and manage zone sets and zones in the zoning database. The Apply button  
saves changes to the zoning database without closing the window. The OK button  
saves the zoning changes to the database and closes the window. Table 3-3  
describes the zoning tool bar operations.  
Table 3-3. Edit Zoning Window Tool Bar Buttons  
Tool Bar Button  
Description  
Create Zone Set button - create a new zone set  
Create Zone button - create a new zone  
Create Alias button - create another name for a set of objects  
Add Member button - add the selected zone to a zone set, or  
add the selected port/device to a zone  
Remove Member button - delete the selected zone from a zone  
set, or delete the selected port/device from a zone  
59048-02 A  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.6  
Managing Zone Sets  
Zoning a fabric involves creating a zone set, creating zones as zone set members,  
then adding devices as zone members. The zoning database supports multiple  
zone sets to serve the different security and access needs of your storage area  
network, but only one zone set can be active at one time. Managing zone sets  
consists of the following tasks:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Creating zone sets  
Activating and deactivating zone sets  
Copying a zone to a zone set  
Removing a zone from one zone set or from all zone sets  
Removing a zone set  
Removing all zoning definitions  
Note:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
3.4.6.1  
Creating a Zone Set  
To create a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
window.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Create Zone Set to open the Create Zone  
Set dialog.  
Enter a name for the zone set, and choose the OK button. The new zone set  
name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. A zone set name must begin with  
a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z,  
a-z, _, -, ^, and $.  
4.  
To create new zones in a zone set, do one of the following:  
„
Right-click a zone set and select Create A Zone from the popup menu.  
In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new zone, and  
choose the OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone  
Sets dialog.  
„
Copy an existing zone by dragging a zone into the new zone set. Refer  
to ”Copying a Zone to a Zone Set” on page 3-23.  
5.  
Choose the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
3-22  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.6.2  
Activating and Deactivating a Zone Set  
You must activate a zone set to apply its zoning definitions to the fabric. Only one  
zone set can be active at one time. When you activate a zone set, the switch  
distributes that zone set to the temporary zoning database on every switch in the  
fabric. If Auto Save is enabled, the new active zone set is saved in the permanent  
zoning database also. Refer to ”FC-SW-2 Auto Save” on page 3-17.  
The purpose of the deactivate function is to suspend all fabric zoning which  
results in free communication fabric wide or no communication depending on the  
default visibility setting. Refer to ”Default Visibility” on page 3-18 for more  
information. It is not necessary to deactivate the active zone set before activating  
a new one.  
„
To activate a zone set, open the Zoning menu and select Activate Zone Set  
to open the Activate Zone Set dialog. Select a zone set from the Select Zone  
Set pull-down menu, and choose the Activate button.  
„
To deactivate the active zone set, open the Zoning menu, select Deactivate  
Zone Set. Acknowledge the warning about traffic disruption, and choose the  
Yes button to confirm that you want to deactivate the active zone set.  
3.4.6.3  
Copying a Zone to a Zone Set  
To copy an existing zone and its membership from one zone set to another, select  
the zone and drag it to the chosen zone set. Choose the Apply button to save  
changes to the zoning database.  
3.4.6.4  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set or from All Zone Sets  
You can remove a zone from a zone set or from all zone sets in the database.  
1.  
In the Faceplate Display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning window.  
2.  
3.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone(s) to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove to remove the zone from the zone  
set, or select Remove from All Zones to remove the zone from all zone  
sets.  
4.  
Choose the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone from a zone set or  
from all zone sets in the database.  
59048-02 A  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.6.5  
Removing a Zone Set  
Removing a zone set from the database affects the member zones in the following  
ways.  
„
„
Member zones that are members of other zone sets are not affected.  
Member zones that are not members of other zone sets become members  
of the orphan zone set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch.  
To delete a zone set from the database, do the following:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Zoning menu and select Edit Zoning to  
open the Edit Zoning window.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone set to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove to remove the zone set.  
Choose the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Alternatively, you may use shortcut menus to remove a zone set from the  
database.  
3.4.6.6  
Removing All Zoning Definitions  
To clear all zone and zone set definitions from the zoning database, choose one of  
the following:  
„
„
Open the Edit menu and select Remove All. In the Remove All dialog,  
choose the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete all zones and zone  
sets.  
Right-click the Zone Sets heading at the top of the Zone Sets tree, and  
select Clear Zoning from the popup menu. Choose the Yes button to  
confirm that you want to delete all zone sets and zones.  
3-24  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.7  
Managing Zones  
Managing zones involves the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Creating a zone in a zone set  
Adding zone members  
Renaming a zone or a zone set  
Removing a zone member  
Removing a zone from a zone set  
Removing a zone from all zone sets  
Changing zone types  
Note:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
3.4.7.1  
Creating a Zone in a Zone Set  
When a zone is created, its zone type is soft. To change the zone type to a hard  
zone, refer to ”Changing Zone Types” on page 3-28 for more information. Refer to  
”Zones” on page 3-14 for information on zone types (soft and hard). To create a  
zone in a zone set, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
window.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Create a Zone.  
In the Create a Zone dialog, enter a name for the new zone, and choose the  
OK button. The new zone name is displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. A zone  
name must begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid  
characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, and -.  
Note:  
If you enter the name of a zone that already exists in the  
database, the SANbox Manager application will create a copy of  
that zone and its membership in the zone set.  
59048-02 A  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
4.  
To add ports or devices to the zone, do one of the following:  
„
In the zone set tree, select the zone set. In the graphic window, select  
the port to add to the zone. Open the Edit menu and select Add  
Members.  
„
„
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or worldwide  
name in the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone.  
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or worldwide  
name in the Port/Device tree. Right-click the zone and select Add  
Zone Members from the popup menu.  
5.  
Choose the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
3.4.7.2  
Adding Zone Members  
Adding a zone member to a zone will affect every zone set in which that zone is a  
member. To add member ports/devices to a zone, do one of the following:  
„
„
„
Select a port by port number, Fibre Channel address, or worldwide name in  
the Port/Device tree, and drag it into the zone. To select and drag multiple  
ports/devices, press and hold the Control key while dragging.  
Select one or more ports by port number, Fibre Channel address, or  
worldwide name in the Port/Device tree. Right-click the zone and select Add  
Zone Members from the popup menu.  
Open the Edit menu or right click on the selected zone and select Create  
Members. Choose the WWN, Domain/Port, or FC address radio button and  
enter the port hex value.  
Choose the Apply button to save changes to the zoning database.  
Note:  
Domain ID conflicts can result in automatic reassignment of switch  
domain IDs. These reassignments are not reflected in zones that use  
domain ID/port number pair to define their membership. Be sure to  
reconfigure zones that are affected by a domain ID change.  
3-26  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.7.3  
Renaming a Zone or a Zone Set  
To rename a zone, do the following:  
1.  
In the Zone Sets tree of the Edit Zoning window, click the zone/zone set to  
be renamed.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Rename.  
In the Rename Zone/Rename Zone Set dialog, enter a new name for the  
zone/zone set.  
4.  
Choose the OK button.  
3.4.7.4  
Removing a Zone Member  
Removing a zone member will affect every zone and zone set in which that zone  
is a member. To remove a member from a zone:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the Edit Zoning window, select the zone member to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove.  
Choose the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning window.  
3.4.7.5  
Removing a Zone from a Zone Set  
Zones that are no longer members of any zone set are moved to the orphan zone  
set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. To remove a zone from a zone  
set:  
1.  
In the Edit Zoning window, select the zone to be removed. The selected  
zone will be removed from that zone set only.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove.  
Choose the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning window.  
3.4.7.6  
Removing a Zone from All Zone Sets  
Zones that are no longer members of any zone set are moved to the orphan zone  
set. The orphan zone set is saved on the switch. To remove a zone from all zone  
sets, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
In the Edit Zoning window, select the zone to be removed.  
Open the Edit menu and select Remove Zone from All Sets.  
Choose the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning window.  
59048-02 A  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.7.7  
Changing Zone Types  
To change a zone type, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the faceplate display, select the switch with the zone type to change.  
Choose the Zoning button to open the Edit Zoning window.  
In the Zone Sets tree, select the zone to change.  
Open the Edit menu and select Set Zone Type to open the Set Zone Type  
dialog.  
5.  
Open the Zone Type pull-down menu and select Soft, ACL, or VPF.  
„
„
Soft zoning is the least restrictive type of zoning.  
ACL zoning is hard zoning and is enforced by hardware and defines  
access to a given port. ACL zones need not include inter-switch links.  
„
VPF zoning is hard zoning that defines ports that can communicate  
with each other. VPF zones must include inter-switch links. On a  
SANbox2-64 switch, a VPF zone cannot extend beyond the ports of a  
single I/O blade.  
3.4.8  
Managing Aliases  
An alias is a collection of objects that can be zoned together. An alias is not a  
zone, and can not have a zone or another alias as a member.  
Note:  
Changes that you make to the zoning database are limited to the  
managed switch and do not propagate to the rest of the fabric. To  
distribute changes to configured zone sets fabric wide, you must edit  
the zoning databases on the individual switches.  
3.4.8.1  
Creating an Alias  
To create an alias, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
window.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Create Alias to open the Create Alias  
dialog.  
Enter a name for the alias, and choose the OK button. The alias name is  
displayed in the Zone Sets dialog. An alias name must begin with a letter  
and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -.  
4.  
Choose the OK button to save the alias name to the zoning database.  
3-28  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
3.4.8.2  
Adding a Member to an Alias  
You can add a member to an alias in the following ways:  
„
Drag-and-drop method.  
„
Select the alias in the left pane and the member in the right pane to add to  
that alias, and choose the Insert button.  
„
Select the alias in the left pane and the member in the right pane to add to  
that alias, and open the Edit menu and select Add Members.  
To add a member to an alias using the drag-and-drop method, do the following:  
1.  
In the right pane, click and hold down the mouse button on the member to  
be added to the alias.  
2.  
Drag the selected member from the right pane to the alias in the left pane.  
To add a member to an alias using the menu options, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Zoning menu, and select Edit Zoning to open the Edit Zoning  
window.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
In the left pane, select an alias.  
In the right pane, select the member to add to the selected alias.  
Choose one of the following:  
„
„
Open the Edit menu and select Add Members.  
Choose the Insert button.  
5.  
Choose the OK button to save changes and close the Edit Zoning window.  
3.4.8.3  
Removing an Alias from All Zones  
To remove an alias from all zones, do the following:  
1.  
In the Zone Sets tree in the Edit Zoning window, select the alias to be  
removed.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Edit menu, and select Remove Alias from All Zones.  
Choose the Yes button in the Remove dialog.  
59048-02 A  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 – Managing Fabrics  
Zoning a Fabric  
Q
Notes  
3-30  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
Managing Switches  
This section describes the following tasks that manage switches in the fabric.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Managing user accounts  
Displaying switch information  
Managing alarms  
Exporting name server information to a file  
Paging a switch  
Resetting a switch  
Setting the date and time  
Configuring a switch  
Archiving a switch  
Restoring a switch  
Managing firmware  
Restoring the factory default configuration  
4.1  
Managing User Accounts  
A user account consists of the following:  
Account name  
Password  
„
„
„
„
Authority level  
Expiration date  
Switches come from the factory with the following user accounts:  
Table 4-1. Factory User Accounts  
Account Name  
Password  
Admin Authority  
Expiration  
admin  
images  
password  
images  
True  
Permanent  
Permanent  
False  
The Admin account is for configuring the switch for the first time. After creating  
your own user accounts, consider changing the password for this account. The  
Admin account has Admin authority which means that this account can view and  
59048-02 A  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
Q
modify the switch and its configuration both with SANbox Manager and the Telnet  
command line interface. Without Admin authority, you are limited to viewing switch  
status and configuration. The Images account is for exchanging files with the  
switch using FTP.  
The factory switch configuration does not enforce user accounts and passwords.  
This means that no account name and password are required to add a fabric and  
modify switch configurations using SANbox Manager. To enforce user accounts  
and authority, set the SecurityEnabled parameter to True using the Set Setup  
System command in the Telnet command line interface. Refer to ”Set Setup  
Command” on page A-46.  
To create, remove, and modify user accounts, open the Switch menu in the  
faceplate display, and select User Accounts.... If fabric security is enabled, your  
account must have Admin authority to manage user accounts.  
4.1.1  
Creating User Accounts  
To create a user account on a particular switch, open the faceplate display and  
select User Accounts.... This displays the User Account Administration dialog  
shown in Figure 4-1. Choose the Add Account tab. A switch can have a  
maximum of 15 user accounts.  
Figure 4-1. Account Administration – Add  
4-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
Q
1.  
2.  
3.  
Enter an account name in the New Account Login field. Account names are  
limited to 15 characters.  
If the account is to have the ability to modify switch configurations, check the  
Admin Authority Enabled box.  
Enter a password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Verify  
Password field. A password must have a minimum of 4 characters and no  
more than 20.  
4.  
If this account is to be permanent with no expiration date, choose the  
Permanent Account radio button. Otherwise, choose the Account Will  
Expire button and enter the number days in which the account will expire.  
If you want to change the authority or the expiration date for an account, you must  
remove the account and recreate it. Refer to ”Removing a User Account” on  
page 4-3.  
4.1.2  
Removing a User Account  
To remove a user account on a particular switch, open the faceplate display and  
select User Accounts.... Choose the Remove Account tab in the dialog to  
present the display shown in Figure 4-2. Select the account name from the list of  
accounts at the top of the dialog and choose the Remove Account button.  
Figure 4-2. Account Administration – Remove  
59048-02 A  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing User Accounts  
Q
4.1.3  
Changing a User Account Password  
To change the password for an account on a particular switch, open the faceplate  
display and select User Accounts.... Choose the Change Password tab in the  
dialog to present the display shown in Figure 4-3. Select the account name from  
the list of accounts at the top of the dialog, then enter the old password, the new  
password, and verify the new password in the corresponding fields. Choose the  
Change Password button.  
Figure 4-3. Account Administration – Change Password  
4-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
Q
4.2  
Displaying Switch Information  
The faceplate display and data windows provide the following specific switch  
information:  
„
„
„
„
„
Name server information  
Switch specifications and addresses  
Configuration parameters  
Performance statistics  
Configured zone sets  
Figure 4-4 shows the faceplate display for the SANbox2-64 switch.  
Figure 4-4. Faceplate Display  
The fabric updates the topology and faceplate displays by forwarding changes in  
status to the management workstation as they occur. You can allow the fabric to  
update the switch status, or you can refresh the display at any time. To refresh  
switch status in the display, do one of the following:  
„
„
„
Choose the Refresh button.  
Open the View menu and select Refresh.  
Press the F5 key.  
59048-02 A  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
Q
„
„
Right-click a switch in the topology display and select Refresh Switch from  
the popup menu.  
Right-click in the graphic window of the faceplate display, and select  
Refresh Switch from the popup menu.  
4.2.1  
Name Server Data Window  
The Name Server data window displays information about the devices that are  
logged into the fabric. Choose the Name Server tab below the data window to  
display name server information for all devices that are logged into the selected  
fabric. To narrow the display to devices that are logged into specific switches,  
select one or more switches in the fabric tree or the topology display. Refer to  
Table 4-2 for a description of the entries in the Name Server data window. Refer to  
”Exporting Name Server Information to a File” on page 4-13 for exporting name  
server information.  
Table 4-2. Name Server Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Description  
Device type: target or initiator  
Target/Initiator  
Switch  
Switch name  
Port  
Port number (0–63)  
Address  
Type  
Fibre Channel address  
Node type  
WWNN  
Node worldwide name  
WWPN  
Port worldwide name  
Vendor  
Host Bus Adapter/Device Vendor  
Device Fibre Channel protocol types  
The active zone to which the device belongs  
FC-4 Types  
Active Zones  
4.2.2  
Switch Data Window  
The Switch data window displays current network and switch information for the  
selected switches. Refer to ”Configuring a Switch” on page 4-14 for more  
information about the Switch data window. To open the Switch data window, select  
one or more switches in the topology display and choose the Switch tab below  
the window. You can also open the Switch data window in the faceplate display.  
Table 4-3 describes the Switch data window entries.  
4-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
Q
Table 4-3. Switch Data Window Entries  
Entry  
FcAddress  
Description  
Switch Fibre Channel address  
World Wide Name  
Reason for Status  
User Name  
Switch worldwide name  
Additional status information  
Account name  
Login Level  
Authority level  
Security Enabled  
Vendor  
Enforcement of account names and authority  
Switch manufacturer  
Firmware Version  
Inactive Firmware Version  
Active firmware version  
Inactive firmware version  
Pending Firmware Version Firmware version that will be activated at the next reset  
PROM/Flasher Version  
MAC Address  
PROM firmware version  
Media Access Control address  
IP Address  
Internet Protocol address  
Subnet Mask  
Mask that determines the IP address subnet  
Gateway address  
Gateway  
Negotiated Domain ID  
Configured Domain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
The domain ID currently being used by the fabric  
The domain ID defined by network administrator  
Domain ID lock status. Prevents (True) or permits (False)  
dynamic domain ID reassignment.  
Number of Ports  
Switch Type  
Number of ports on the switch  
Switch model  
Operational State  
Administrative State  
Configured Admin State  
Switch operational state: Online, Offline, Diagnostic  
Current switch administrative state  
Switch administrative state that is stored in the switch  
configuration  
RA Timeout  
ED Timeout  
Resource allocation timeout value  
Error detect timeout value  
59048-02 A  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
Q
Table 4-3. Switch Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
FC-SW-2 Compliant  
Description  
Zoning merge status. If True, changes to the active zone  
set are propagated throughout the fabric. If false, changes  
to the zoning database are propagated throughout the  
fabric.  
LegacyAddressFormat  
FC-SW-2 Auto Save  
Legacy port addressing status. Enabled only for  
interoperability with non-FC-SW-2 switches.  
Zoning auto save status. Saves zoning updates in  
temporary and permanent memory (True) or only in  
temporary memory (False).  
Zoning Default Visibility  
Zoning visibility status. Permits (All) or prevents (None)  
communication with other switches in the absence of an  
active zone set.  
Temperature  
Internal switch temperature °C  
Fan 1 status  
Fan 1 Status  
Fan 2 Status  
Fan 2 status  
Fan 3 Status  
Fan 3 status  
Power Supply 1 Status  
Power Supply 2 Status  
Beacon Status  
Power supply 1 status  
Power supply 2 status  
Beacon status. Switch LEDs are blinking (On) or not (off).  
Broadcast Support  
Broadcast support status. Broadcast support is enabled or  
disabled (default).  
Inband Enabled  
Inband management status. Permits (True) or prevents  
(False) a switch from being managed over an ISL.  
Temp Failure Port  
Shutdown  
Not applicable.  
Warning Temperature  
Failure Temperature  
Not applicable.  
Not applicable.  
4-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
Q
4.2.3  
Link Data Window  
The Link data window displays information about all switch links in the fabric or  
selected links. This information includes the switch name, the port number at the  
end of each link, and the link status. To open the Link data window, choose the  
Link tab below the window.  
4.2.4  
Port Statistics Data Window  
The Port Statistics data window displays port performance data for the selected  
ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, choose the Port Stats tab below  
the data window in the faceplate display. Refer to Table 6-5 for a description of the  
Port Statistics data window entries.  
The Statistics pull-down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and  
provides different ways to view detailed port information. Choose the down arrow  
to open the pull-down menu. Open the pull-down menu and select Absolute to  
view the total count of statistics since the last switch reset. Select Rate to view the  
number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select Baseline  
to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set.  
Choose the Clear Baseline button to set the current baseline.  
4.2.5  
Port Information Data Window  
The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected  
ports. To open the Port Statistics data window, choose the Port Info tab below the  
data window in the faceplate display. Refer to Table 6-6 for a description of the  
Port Information data window entries.  
59048-02 A  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 – Managing Switches  
Displaying Switch Information  
Q
4.2.6  
Configured Zonesets Data Window  
The Configured Zonesets data window displays all zone sets, zones, and zone  
membership in the zoning database, as shown in Figure 4-5. To open the  
Configured Zonesets data window, choose the Configured Zonesets tab below  
the data window in the faceplate display.  
The Configured Zonesets data window uses display conventions for expanding  
and contracting entries that are similar to the fabric tree. An entry handle located  
to the left of an entry in the tree indicates that the entry can be expanded. Click  
this handle or double-click the following entries to expand or contract them:  
„
„
A zone set entry expands to show its member zones.  
A zone entry expands to show its members by port number, worldwide  
name, or Fibre Channel address.  
Figure 4-5. Configured Zonesets Data Window  
4-10  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring Alarms  
Q
4.3  
Configuring Alarms  
You can configure the switch to generate alarms for selected events. Configuring  
an alarm involves choosing an event type, rising and falling thresholds, a  
sampling interval, and finally enabling or disabling the alarm. To configure alarms,  
do the following:  
1.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Configure Alarm  
Thresholds.  
2.  
The Alarm Threshold Configuration dialog shown in Figure 4-6 prompts you  
to enable or disable all alarms, select an event, set thresholds, set a  
sampling interval and enable or disable an individual alarm.  
Figure 4-6. Alarm Threshold Configuration Dialog  
3.  
4.  
Check the Enable All Alarm Thresholds box to enable monitoring for all  
the individual alarm types that are enabled. The Enable All Alarm  
Thresholds box is the master control for the individual alarms. For example,  
the switch will monitor CRC errors only if both the CRC Error Enable box  
and the Enable All Alarm Thresholds box are checked.  
Select an event type from the Alarm Threshold pull-down menu. Choose  
from the following options:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
CRC error monitoring  
Decode error monitoring  
ISL monitoring  
Device login monitoring  
Device logout monitoring  
Loss of signal monitoring  
5.  
Enter a value for the falling threshold. A falling threshold alarm is generated  
when the event count descends below the falling threshold.  
59048-02 A  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring Alarms  
Q
6.  
Enter a value for the rising threshold. A rising threshold alarm is generated  
when the event count exceeds the rising threshold. The switch will not  
generate another rising threshold alarm for that event until the count  
descends below the falling threshold and rises again above the rising  
threshold. Consider the example in Figure 4-7.  
Note:  
The switch will down a port if a rising threshold alarm is not  
cleared after three consecutive sample intervals.  
Generate rising  
threshold alarm;  
eligibility ends  
Generate rising  
threshold alarm;  
eligibility ends  
Rising  
Threshold  
Event  
Count  
Falling  
Threshold  
Generate falling  
threshold alarm;  
eligibility is reset  
Sample Interval  
Figure 4-7. Alarm Threshold Example  
7.  
8.  
Enter a sample interval in seconds. The sample interval defines the period of  
time in which to count events.  
Check the Enable box to make the alarm eligible for use. Repeat steps 3  
through 8 for each alarm you want to configure or enable. You must also  
check the Enable All Alarm Thresholds box, which is the master control for  
all alarm configurations.  
9.  
Choose the OK button to save all changes.  
4-12  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Exporting Name Server Information to a File  
Q
4.4  
Exporting Name Server Information to a File  
To save name server information to a file, open the topology display and do the  
following:  
1.  
Select one or more switches. If no switches are selected, name server  
information is gathered for the all switches.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Open the Switch menu and select Export Name Server.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name.  
Choose the Save button.  
4.5  
Paging a Switch  
You can use the beacon feature to page a switch. The beacon feature causes all  
Port Status LEDs to flash, making it easier to recognize. To page a switch, open  
the Switch menu in the faceplate display and enable the Toggle Beacon  
selection. To cancel the beacon, reselect Toggle Beacon.  
4.6  
Setting the Date and Time  
To set the date and time on a switch, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select a switch in the topology display, and open the faceplate display.  
Open the Switch menu, and select Set Date/Time....  
Enter the year, month, day and time in the Switch Date and Time dialog,  
then click OK. The new date and time take effect immediately.  
4.7  
Resetting a Switch  
Resetting a switch reboots the switch using configuration parameters in memory.  
Depending on the type, a switch reset may or may not include power-on self test  
or it may or may not disrupt traffic. Table 4-4 describes the types of switch resets:  
59048-02 A  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
Table 4-4. Switch Resets  
Type  
Hot Reset  
Description  
Resets a switch without a power-on self test. This reset activates  
the pending firmware, but does not disrupt switch traffic. You can  
perform this reset using SANbox Manager or the Hotreset  
command. Refer to ”Hotreset Command” on page A-16.  
Reset without  
POST  
Resets a switch without a power-on self test. This reset activates  
the pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic. You can  
perform this type of reset using the following:  
„ SANbox Manager  
„ Reset Switch command. Refer to ”Reset Command” on  
page A-25.  
„ Maintenance button. Refer to your switch Installation Guide.  
Hard Reset  
Resets a switch with a power-on self test. This reset activates the  
pending firmware and it is disruptive to switch traffic. You can  
perform this type of reset by using or doing the following:  
„ SANbox Manager  
„ Hardreset command. Refer to the ”Hardreset Command” on  
page A-13.  
„ Power cycle the switch.  
To reset a switch using SANbox Manager, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select the switch to be reset and open the faceplate display.  
Open the Switch menu and select the Reset Switch pull-down menu:  
„
„
„
Select Hot Reset to perform a hot reset.  
Select Reset to perform a standard reset.  
Select Hard Reset to perform a hard reset.  
4.8  
Configuring a Switch  
Switch configuration is divided into two areas: chassis configuration and network  
configuration. Chassis configuration specifies switch-wide Fibre Channel settings.  
Network configuration specifies Ethernet and SNMP settings.  
To open the Switch Properties dialog, open the Switch menu and select Switch  
Properties. You may also right-click a switch graphic in the topology display or  
faceplate display, and select Switch Properties from the popup menu.  
4-14  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.1  
Switch Properties  
Use the Switch Properties dialog to change the following switch configuration  
parameters:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Symbolic name  
Administrative state  
Domain ID and domain ID lock  
Broadcast support (TCP/IP)  
Inband management  
FC-SW-2 compliance for zoning  
Legacy port address format  
The timeout values are displayed only for reference purposes when the switch is  
online; they become active when the switch is taken offline. After making changes,  
choose the OK button to put the new values into effect.  
Figure 4-8. Switch Properties Dialog  
59048-02 A  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.1.1  
Symbolic Name  
A user-defined name of up to 63 characters that identifies the switch.  
4.8.1.2  
Switch Administrative States  
The switch administrative state determines the operational state of the switch. The  
switch administrative state exists in two forms: the configured administrative state  
and the current administrative state.  
„
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANbox Manager  
always makes changes to the configured administrative state.  
„
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the switch for  
temporary purposes and is not retained across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Switch command. Refer to the ”Set  
Command” on page A-30.  
Table 4-5 describes the administrative state values.  
Table 4-5. Switch Administrative States  
Parameter  
Online  
Description  
The switch is available.  
Offline  
Test  
The switch is unavailable.  
The switch is in diagnostics mode and is unavailable.  
4.8.1.3  
Domain ID and Domain ID Lock  
The domain ID is a unique Fibre Channel identifier for the switch. The Fibre  
Channel address consists of the domain ID, port ID, and the Arbitrated Loop  
Physical Address (ALPA). The maximum number of switches within a fabric is 239  
with each switch having a unique domain ID.  
Switches come from the factory with the domain IDs unlocked. This means that if  
there is a domain ID conflict in the fabric, the switch with the highest principal  
priority, or the principal switch, will reassign any domain ID conflicts and establish  
the fabric. If you lock the domain ID on a switch and a domain ID conflict occurs,  
one of the switches will isolate as a separate fabric and the Port Status LEDs on  
both switches will flash to show the affected ports. Refer to the ”Set Config  
Command” on page A-32 for information about the switch keyword and the  
Domain ID Lock and Principal Priority parameters.  
If you connect a new switch to an existing fabric with its domain ID unlocked, and  
a domain conflict occurs, the new switch will isolate as a separate fabric.  
4-16  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
However, you can remedy this by resetting the new switch or taking it offline then  
back online. The principal switch will reassign the domain ID and the switch will  
join the fabric.  
Note:  
Domain ID reassignment is not reflected in zoning that is defined by  
domain ID and port number pair. You must reconfigure zones that are  
affected by domain ID reassignment.  
4.8.1.4  
Broadcast Support  
Broadcast is supported on the SANbox2 which allows for TCP/IP support.  
Broadcast is implemented using the proposed standard specified in Multi-Switch  
Broadcast for FC-SW-3, T11 Presentation Number T11/02-031v0. FSPF is used  
to setup a fabric spanning tree used in transmission of broadcast frames.  
Broadcast frames are retransmitted on all ISLs indicated in the spanning tree and  
all online F/FL_Ports. Broadcast zoning is supported with Access Control List  
(ACL) and Virtual Private Fabric (VPF) hard zones. When a broadcast frame is  
received, these hard zones are enforced at the F/FL_Port. If the originator of the  
broadcast is in a hard zone, the frame is retransmitted on all online F/FL_Ports  
within the hard zone. If the originator of the broadcast frame is not in a hard zone,  
the frame is retransmitted on online F/FL_Ports that are not in a hard zone.  
4.8.1.5  
Inband Management  
Inband management is the ability to manage switches across inter-switch links  
using SANbox Manager, SNMP, IPFC, management server, or the application  
programming interface. The switch comes from the factory with inband  
management enabled. If you disable inband management on a particular switch,  
you can no longer communicate with that switch by means other than a direct  
Ethernet or serial connection.  
4.8.1.6  
FC-SW-2 Compliance for Zoning  
When a zone set is activated, SANbox2 switches and other FC-SW-2 compliant  
switches propagate the active zone set to all switches in the fabric. Some non-FC-  
SW-2 compliant switches propagate not only the active zone set, but the entire  
zoning database. Disabling this parameter causes the SANbox2 switch to  
propagate the zoning database, and therefore, interoperate with non-FC-SW-2  
switches. For FC-SW-2 compliant fabrics, this parameter should be enabled.  
Note:  
The FC-SW-2 Compliant setting must be the same on all switches in  
the fabric, otherwise the inter-switch links will not connect.  
59048-02 A  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.1.7  
Legacy Port Address Format  
Legacy Address Format should be enabled only to permit interoperation with  
certain older non-FC-SW-2, non-QLogic switches. Enabling this setting under  
other circumstances will disable zoning that is defined by domain ID and port  
number. This setting is available only when the FC-SW-2 Compliant setting is  
disabled. Contact your authorized maintenance provider for assistance in using  
this feature.  
Note:  
The Legacy Address Format setting must be the same on all  
switches in the fabric, otherwise the inter-switch links will not connect.  
4.8.1.8  
Timeout Values  
The switch timeout values determine the timeout values for all ports on the switch.  
Table 4-6 describes the switch timeout parameters. The timeout values must be  
the same for all switches in the fabric.  
Note:  
Timeout values can only be changed if the switch is offline.  
Table 4-6. Timeout Values  
Parameter  
Description  
R_A_TOV  
Resource Allocation Timeout: Represents the maximum time a frame  
could be delayed in the Fabric and still be delivered. The default is  
10000 milliseconds.  
E_D_TOV  
Error Detect Timeout: Represents the maximum round trip time that  
an operation between two N_Ports could require. The default is 2000  
milliseconds.  
4-18  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.2  
Network Properties  
Use the Network Properties dialog shown in Figure 4-9 to change IP and SNMP  
configuration parameters. After making changes, choose the OK button to put the  
new values into effect. To open the Network Properties dialog, open the Switch  
menu and select Network Properties.  
Note:  
Since Read Community, Trap Community, and Write Community  
settings are like passwords, they are write-only fields; the current  
settings are not displayed.  
Figure 4-9. Network Properties Dialog  
59048-02 A  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.2.1  
IP Configuration  
The IP configuration identifies the switch on the Ethernet network and determines  
which network discovery method to use. Table 4-7 describes the IP configuration  
parameters.  
Table 4-7. IP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Network  
Description  
Choose one of the following methods by which to assign the IP  
address:  
Discovery  
„ Static - Uses the IP configuration parameters entered in the  
Switch Properties dialog.  
„ BootP - Acquires the IP configuration from a BootP server.  
„ RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) - Acquires the IP  
address from an RARP server. An RARP request is broadcast  
with up to three retries, each at 5 second intervals. If no IP  
address is obtained, the switch reverts to the previously  
configured IP address.  
„ DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - Acquires the IP  
configuration from a DHCP server. If no satisfactory lease is  
obtained, the DHCP client attempts to use the previously  
configured lease. If the previous lease cannot be used, no IP  
address will be assigned to this switch in order to avoid an IP  
address conflict. The DHCP server must then be made available.  
If a BootP, RARP, or DHCP server is not available, the switch will  
attempt to use a previously assigned valid lease. If no lease was  
ever assigned, the switch will attempt to use the previously assigned  
static IP address.  
IP Address  
Subnet mask  
Gateway  
Internet Protocol (IP) address for the Ethernet port. The default value  
is 10.0.0.1.  
Subnet mask address for the Ethernet port. The default value is  
255.0.0.0.  
IP gateway address. The default value is 10.0.0.254.  
4-20  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.2.2  
SNMP Configuration  
The SNMP configuration defines how authentication traps are managed.  
Table 4-8 describes the SNMP configuration parameters.  
Table 4-8. SNMP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
SNMP Proxy  
SNMP proxy. Enables or disables SNMP communication with other  
switches in the fabric.  
Contact  
Specifies the name (up to 32 characters) of the person who is to be  
contacted to respond to trap events. The default is “undefined”.  
Read  
Community  
Read community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to read information from the switch. This is a write-only  
field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server  
must be the same. The default is “public”.  
Trap Community Trap community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on  
the switch and the SNMP management server must be the same.  
The default is “public”.  
Location  
Specifies the name (up to 32 characters) for the switch location. The  
default is “undefined”.  
Authentication  
Trap  
Enables or disables the reporting of SNMP authentication failures. If  
enabled, a notification trap is sent when incorrect community string  
values are used. The default value is False.  
Write  
Community  
Write community password (up to 32 characters) that authorizes an  
SNMP agent to write information to the switch. This is a write-only  
field. The value on the switch and the SNMP management server  
must be the same. The default is “private”.  
59048-02 A  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4 – Managing Switches  
Configuring a Switch  
Q
4.8.2.3  
SNMP Trap Configuration  
The SNMP trap configuration defines how traps are set. Choose from the tabs  
Trap1 – Trap 5 and configure the trap. Table 4-9 describes the SNMP  
configuration parameters.  
Table 4-9. SNMP Trap Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Trap Version  
Trap Enabled  
Trap Address1  
Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) with which to format traps.  
Enables or disables the trap.  
Specifies the IP address to which SNMP traps are sent. A maximum  
of 5 trap addresses are supported. The default address for trap 1 is  
10.0.0.254. The default address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0.  
Trap Port1  
The port number on which the trap is sent. The default is 162.  
Trap Severity  
Specifies a severity level to assign to the trap. Open the pull-down  
menu and choose a level. Traps must be enabled to access this pull-  
down menu. Trap severity levels include Unknown, Emergency,  
Alert, Critical, Error, Warning, Notify, Info, Debug, and Mark  
1Trap address (other than 0.0.0.0) and trap port combinations must be unique. For example, if trap 1  
and trap 2 have the same address, then they must have different port values. Similarly, if trap 1 and  
2 have the same port value, they must have different addresses.  
4.8.2.4  
Remote Logging  
The Remote Logging (syslog) feature enables saving of the log information to a  
remote host that supports the syslog protocol. When enabled, the log entries are  
sent to the syslog host at the IP address that you specify in the Logging Host IP  
Address field. Log entries are saved in the internal switch log whether this feature  
is enabled or not.  
To save log information to a remote host, you must edit the syslog.conf file and  
then restart the syslog daemon. The syslog.conf file on the remote host must  
contain an entry that specifies the name of the log file in which to save error  
messages. Add the following line to the syslog.conf file. A <tab> separates the  
selector field (local0.info) and action field which contains the log file path name (/  
var/adm/messages/messages.name).  
local0.info <tab> /var/adm/messages.name  
4-22  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 – Managing Switches  
Archiving a Switch  
Q
4.9  
Archiving a Switch  
You can create an .XML archive file containing the configuration parameters.  
Archived parameters include the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Switch properties and statistics  
IP configuration  
SNMP configuration  
Port properties and statistics  
Alarm configuration  
Zoning configuration  
This archive file can be used to restore the configuration on the same switch or on  
a replacement switch. You can also use the archive file as a template for  
configuring new switches to add to a fabric. Security settings and user account  
information are not archived. The archive can be used later to restore the switch.  
Refer to ”Restoring a Switch” on page 4-24 for more information.  
To archive a switch, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Switch menu and select Archive.  
In the Save dialog, enter a file name.  
Choose the Save button.  
59048-02 A  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring a Switch  
Q
4.10  
Restoring a Switch  
Restoring a switch loads the archived switch configuration parameters to the  
switch. The switch configuration must be archived before it can be restored.  
Furthermore, the switch archive must be compatible with the switch to be  
restored; that is, you cannot restore a SANbox2-64 switch with a SANbox2-16  
archive. Refer to ”Archiving a Switch” on page 4-23 for more information.  
To restore a switch, do the following:  
1.  
Log in to the fabric through the switch you want to restore. You cannot  
restore a switch over an ISL.  
2.  
Open the Switch menu and select Restore to display the Restore dialog  
shown in Figure 4-10. The Restore dialog offers a Full Restore and a  
Selective Restore tab.  
Figure 4-10. Restore Dialogs – Full and Selective  
3.  
4.  
Enter the archive file name or browse for the file. This archive file must be  
one that was produced by the SANbox Manager Archive function.  
Configuration backup files created with the Config Backup command are not  
compatible with the SANbox Manager Restore function.  
To restore all configuration settings, choose the Full Restore tab, then  
choose the Restore button. To restore selected configuration settings,  
4-24  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring a Switch  
Q
choose the Selective Restore tab and check one or more of the following  
boxes, then choose the Restore button:  
„
Network Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Network  
properties dialog except the IP address. Refer to ”Network Properties”  
on page 4-19.  
„
„
IP Address: Restores switch IP address in addition to the other  
network properties.  
Switch Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Switch  
properties dialog except the domain ID. Refer to ”Switch Properties” on  
page 4-15.  
„
„
„
Domain ID: Restores switch domain ID in addition to the other switch  
properties.  
Port Properties: Restores all settings presented in the Port properties  
dialog. Refer to ”Configuring Ports” on page 6-9.  
Configured Zoning: Restores all zone sets, zones, and aliases in the  
switch’s zoning database.  
59048-02 A  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 – Managing Switches  
Managing Firmware  
Q
4.11  
Managing Firmware  
The switch memory is partitioned for two firmware images. One of these partitions  
contains the active firmware; that is, the firmware version that is in use. The other  
partition contains the inactive firmware which is not in use. The pending firmware  
is the firmware that will be activated at the next switch reset. The pending  
firmware can be the active firmware or the inactive firmware. When you install new  
firmware, that image becomes the inactive firmware and the pending firmware.  
Upon resetting the switch, this image becomes both the active and pending  
firmware.  
Firmware management tools enable you to do the following:  
„
„
„
Install and activate new firmware  
Activate the pending firmware  
Change the pending firmware  
Note:  
To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that  
all switches are running the same version of firmware.  
4.11.1  
Installing Firmware  
Installing firmware involves loading, unpacking, and activating the firmware image  
on the switch. SANbox Manager does this in one operation.  
Note:  
For firmware versions that follow the initial release of version 2.0, you  
have the ability to install and activate new firmware without resetting  
the switch, and therefore, without disrupting traffic. SANbox Manager  
will attempt a non-disruptive firmware installation and activation  
whenever possible.  
To install firmware, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Load Firmware.  
In the Firmware Upload dialog, choose the Select button to browse and  
select the firmware file to be uploaded.  
3.  
4.  
Choose the Start button to begin the firmware load process.  
When the loading is complete, choose the Close button to close the  
Firmware Upload dialog.  
5.  
If a non-disruptive activation is not possible, SANbox Manager prompts you  
to reset the switch. Choose the OK button to reset the switch and activate  
the new firmware.  
4-26  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
Q
4.11.2  
Activating the Pending Firmware  
To activate firmware that is both inactive and pending, open the Switch menu in  
the faceplate display and select Activate Firmware. SANbox Manager attempts a  
non-disruptive activation if the active and pending firmware versions are 2.0 or  
greater. Otherwise, SANbox Manager prompts you reset the switch to activate the  
pending firmware.  
4.11.3  
Changing the Pending Firmware  
To change the pending firmware to the alternate image, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, open the Switch menu and select Firmware  
Fallback.  
The Firmware Fallback dialog prompts you to confirm the firmware version  
that is to become the pending firmware. Choose the Yes button to select the  
fallback firmware or No to cancel.  
3.  
SANbox Manager attempts a non-disruptive activation if the active and  
pending firmware versions are 2.0 or greater. Otherwise, SANbox Manager  
prompts you reset the switch to activate the pending firmware.  
4.12  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
You can restore the switch and port configuration settings to the factory default  
values. To restore the factory configuration on a switch, open the Switch menu  
and select Restore Factory Defaults. Table 4-10 lists the factory default switch  
configuration settings.  
Restoring the switch to the factory default configuration does not restore the  
account name and password settings. To restore user accounts, you must select  
Reset Password File option in the maintenance menu. Refer to “Recovering a  
Switch” in the Installation Guide for your switch for information about maintenance  
mode and the maintenance menu.  
Table 4-10. Factory Default Configuration Settings  
Setting  
Value  
Symbolic name  
SANbox2  
Online  
1
Administrative state  
Domain ID  
Domain ID Lock  
Inband Management  
False  
True  
59048-02 A  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4 – Managing Switches  
Restoring the Factory Default Configuration  
Q
Table 4-10. Factory Default Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Setting  
Broadcast Support  
Value  
Enable  
Resource Allocation Timeout (RA TOV)  
Error Detect Timeout (ED TOV)  
IP address  
10000 milliseconds  
2000 milliseconds  
10.0.0.1  
Subnet mask address  
Gateway address  
Network Discovery  
Remote Logging  
Remote Logging host IP address  
Contact  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
Static  
False  
10.0.0.254  
Undefined  
Undefined  
False  
Location  
Trap enabled  
Trap port  
162  
Trap address  
Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2-5: 0.0.0.0  
Trap community  
Read community  
Write community  
Port state  
Public  
Public  
Private  
Online  
Auto-detect  
GL  
Port speed  
Port mode  
4-28  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Managing I/O Blades  
An I/O blade is a component switch of the larger SANbox2-64 switch. When you  
configure an I/O blade and its ports you are really configuring the slot. Because  
this configuration is saved on the switch CPU, any I/O blade that you install in that  
slot will acquire that configuration. This section describes the following I/O blade  
management tasks:  
„
„
„
„
„
Displaying I/O blade information  
Changing the blade administrative state  
Testing a blade  
Resetting a blade  
Hot Swap Wizard  
5.1  
Displaying I/O Blade Information  
The Blade Information data window displays information for the selected I/O  
blades. To open the Blade Information data window, choose the Blade Info tab  
below the data window in the faceplate display. Table 5-1 describes the Blade  
Information data window entries.  
Table 5-1. Blade Information Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Description  
Functional status  
State  
Configured Administrative State  
I/O blade administrative state stored in the  
switch configuration  
Operational Administrative State  
I/O blade operational state: online, offline,  
diagnostics, or down.  
Diagnostic Status  
Results of the most recent diagnostic test  
Temperature Status  
Operational status based on internal  
temperature  
Temperature  
Internal switch temperature reported by  
this I/O blade  
Credit Pool  
Number of credits in the credit pool  
Zircon processor firmware version  
Zircon Version  
59048-02 A  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing I/O Blades  
Changing the I/O Blade Administrative State  
Q
5.2  
Changing the I/O Blade Administrative State  
The I/O blade administrative state determines the operational status of the I/O  
blade and its ports. The I/O blade administrative state exists in two forms: the  
configured administrative state and the current administrative state.  
„
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANbox Manager  
always makes changes to the configured administrative state.  
„
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the I/O blade  
for temporary purposes and is not retained across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Blade command. Refer to the ”Set  
Command” on page A-30.  
Table 5-2 describes the administrative state values. To change the I/O blade  
administrative state, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the faceplate display and click on one or more of the I/O blades.  
Open the Blade menu and select Blade Properties. Table 5-2 describes the  
administrative state values. In the Blade Properties dialog, choose the radio  
button that corresponds to the state you want, and choose the OK button.  
Table 5-2. Switch Administrative States  
Parameter  
Online  
Description  
The I/O blade is available.  
Offline  
The I/O blade is unavailable.  
Diagnostics  
The I/O blade is in diagnostics mode and is unavailable.  
5.3  
Testing an I/O Blade  
Testing an I/O blade performs a register test of the ASIC and a SerDes level  
loopback test of all ports. To test an I/O blade, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select an I/O blade.  
Open the Blade menu and select Blade Properties.  
Click the Test radio button in the Blade Properties dialog to place the I/O  
blade in test mode. Choose the OK button.  
4.  
5.  
Open the Blade menu and select Test Blade.  
Choose the Start button in the Test Blade dialog.  
5-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5 – Managing I/O Blades  
Resetting an I/O Blade  
Q
5.4  
Resetting an I/O Blade  
Resetting an I/O blade reinitializes the I/O blade using the saved configuration. To  
reset an I/O blade, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more blades in the faceplate display.  
Open the Blade menu and select Reset Blade.  
5.5  
Hot Swap Wizard  
The Hot Swap Wizard is a series of dialogs that walk you through the process of  
replacing, removing, or inserting an I/O blade while the switch is running. Each  
type of hot swap procedure uses its own set of dialogs within the Hot Swap  
Wizard. The current step in the hot swap procedure is highlighted in the left side of  
the Hot Swap Wizard dialog.  
Note:  
The Hot Swap Wizard is only available to the out-of-band switch. You  
can not use the Hot Swap Wizard over an inter-switch link.  
Always perform the hot swap procedure as prompted by the wizard,  
otherwise the switch will become unresponsive. For example, if you  
install a blade in the wrong slot, proceed as though no mistake had  
been made and follow the rest of the hot swap procedure. When  
complete, perform the operation again with the correct slot. If the  
switch becomes unresponsive, you must power cycle the switch.  
To start the Hot Swap Wizard, open the Switch menu in the faceplate display, and  
select Hot Swap Wizard. Following is an overview of each of hot swap procedure:  
„
Replacing an I/O Blade  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select the Replace a Blade hot swap procedure  
Select and confirm the slot in which to replace the blade.  
The Port Status LEDs will flash green to positively identify the I/O  
blade. Remove the I/O blade and confirm.  
4.  
Install the new I/O blade and confirm. The Port Status LEDs will flash  
amber in port number sequence, then green.  
„
Inserting an I/O Blade  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select the Insert a Blade hot swap procedure  
Select and confirm the slot in which to insert the blade.  
Install the new I/O blade and confirm. The Port Status LEDs will flash  
amber in port number sequence, then green.  
59048-02 A  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 – Managing I/O Blades  
Hot Swap Wizard  
Q
„
Removing an I/O Blade  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Select the Remove a Blade hot swap procedure  
Select and confirm the slot from which to remove the blade.  
The Port Status LEDs will flash green to positively identify the I/O  
blade. Remove the I/O blade and confirm.  
5-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 6  
Managing Ports  
This section describes the following tasks that manage ports and devices:  
„
„
„
Displaying port information  
Configuring ports  
Testing ports  
6.1  
Displaying Port Information  
Port information is available primarily in the faceplate display shown in Figure 6-1.  
The faceplate display data windows provide information and statistics for switches  
and ports. Use the topology display to show the status information for links  
between switches.  
Figure 6-1. Faceplate Display – Port Information  
59048-02 A  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
6.1.1  
Monitoring Port Status  
The faceplate display provides the following port related information:  
Port mode  
Port operational state  
„
„
„
„
Port speed  
Port media  
To display port number and status information for a port, position the cursor over a  
port on the faceplate display. The status information changes depending on the  
View menu option selected.  
6.1.1.1  
Displaying Port Modes  
To display port mode status, from the faceplate display, open the View menu, and  
select View Port Modes. Table 6-1 lists the possible port modes and their  
meanings.  
Table 6-1. Port Modes  
Mode  
Description  
F
Fabric port  
FL  
TL  
G
Fabric loop port  
Translated loop port  
Generic port  
GL  
E
Generic fabric loop port  
Expansion port (inter-switch link)  
Donor port  
D
6-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
6.1.1.2  
Displaying Port Operational States  
To display the operational state on each port in the faceplate display, open the  
View menu and select View Port States. Table 6-2 lists the possible operational  
states and their meanings. The port operational state refers to actual port state  
and not the administrative state you may have assigned.  
Table 6-2. Port Operational States  
State  
Description  
On  
Ia  
Online – port is active and ready to send data.  
Inactive – port operational state is offline, but administrative state is  
online.  
Iso  
Off  
Isolated – E_Port has lost its connection.  
Offline – port is active, can receive signal, but cannot accept a device  
login.  
Tst  
Dn  
Diagnostics – port is in diagnostics mode in preparation for testing  
Down – the port is inactive or shut off, not receiving a signal, and can’t  
be logged in.  
6.1.1.3  
Displaying Port Speeds  
To display the speed of each port in the faceplate display, open the View menu  
and select View Port Speeds. Table 6-3 lists the possible speeds.  
Table 6-3. Port Speeds  
State  
Description  
Au  
Auto-detect  
1Gb  
2Gb  
1 Gbps transmission speed  
2 Gbps transmission speed  
59048-02 A  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
6.1.1.4  
Displaying Transceiver Media Status  
To display transceiver media status, open the View menu and select View Port  
Media. Table 6-2 lists the possible media states and their meanings.  
Table 6-4. Transceiver Media View  
Media Icon  
Description  
Optical SFP, Online (Green)  
Optical SFP, Offline (Gray)  
None  
Empty port, no transceiver installed  
6.1.2  
Port Statistics Data Window  
The Port Statistics data window displays statistics about port performance. To  
open the Port Statistics window, select one or more ports in the faceplate display  
and choose the Port Stats tab below the data window. Table 6-5 describes the  
Port Statistics data window entries.  
The Statistics pull-down menu is available on the Port Statistics data window, and  
provides different ways to view detailed port information. Choose the down arrow  
to open the pull-down menu. Open the pull-down menu and select Absolute to  
view the total count of statistics since the last switch reset. Select Rate to view the  
number of statistics counted per second over the polling period. Select Baseline  
to view the total count of statistics since the last time the baseline was set. When  
viewing baseline statistics, choose the Clear Baseline button to set the current  
baseline.  
Table 6-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Start Time  
Description  
The beginning of the period over which the statistics apply. The  
start time for the Absolute view is not applicable. The start time  
for the Rate view is the beginning of polling interval. The start  
time for the Baseline view is the last time the baseline was set.  
End Time  
The last time the statistics were updated on the display.  
Total time period from start time to end time.  
Total Time  
Login Count  
Number of device logins that have occurred on the switch.  
6-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
Table 6-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Logout Count  
Al Init Count  
Number of device logouts that have occurred on the switch.  
Number of times the port entered the initialization state.  
Invalid Destination  
Address  
Number of address identifier (S_ID, D_ID) errors. AL_PA  
equals 0 on FL_Port or non-zero AL_PA found on F_Port.  
Total LIP Received  
LIP(f7,f7) Count  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames received.  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire an AL_PA.  
Currently not used.  
LIP(f7,f8) Count  
LIP(f7,AL_PS) Count  
This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_port, identified by  
AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and is  
trying to restore the loop.  
LIP(f8,AL_PS) Count  
This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_port  
identified by AL_PS.  
LIP (AL_PD,AL_PS)  
Count  
Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific) resets,  
performed.  
AL Init Errors  
Number of times the port entered initialization and the  
initialization failed. Increments count when port has a sync  
loss.  
Class 2 In Frames  
Class 2 Out Frames  
Class 2 Words In  
Class 2 Words Out  
Class 3 In Frames  
Class 3 Out Frames  
Class 3 Words In  
Class 3 Words Out  
Decode Error Count  
Number of class 2 frames received by this port.  
Number of class 2 frames transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 2 words received by this port.  
Number of class 2 words transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames received by this port.  
Number of class 3 frames transmitted by this port.  
Number of class 3 words received by this port.  
Number of class 3 words transmitted by this port.  
Number of invalid transmission words detected during  
decoding. Decoding is from the 10-bit characters and special K  
characters.  
Loss Of Sync Count  
Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this  
port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an  
invalid transmission word.  
59048-02 A  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
Table 6-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Invalid CRC Count  
Tx Wait Count  
Number of invalid Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) frames  
detected.  
Number of times the port entered a wait state because it didn't  
receive credit to transmit from the attached device.  
Class 3 Toss Count  
Number of class 2 and class 3 sequences that were discarded  
by this port. A sequence can be discarded because of  
detection of a missing frame (based on SEQ_CNT), detection  
of an E_D_TOV timeout, receiving a reject frame, receiving  
frames for a stopped sequence, or other causes.  
FReject Count  
FBusy Count  
Number of frames, from devices, that have been rejected.  
Frames can be rejected for any of a large number of reasons.  
Number of class 2 and class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames  
generated by this port in response to incoming frames. This  
usually indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_port that  
is preventing delivery of this frame.  
Link Failures  
Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link  
failure is a loss of synchronization or by loss of signal while not  
in the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to  
attempt to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established,  
a link failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link  
failure.  
Primitive Sequence  
Errors  
Number of bad primitives received by the port.  
Rx Link Resets  
Number of link reset primitives received from an attached  
device.  
Tx Link Resets  
Number of link reset primitives sent from this port to an  
attached port.  
Rx Offline Sequences Number of offline sequence primitives received by the port.  
Tx Offline Sequences Number of offline primitives transmitted by the port.  
Total Errors  
Total number of primitive and non-primitive port link errors.  
Total number of frames transmitted by the port.  
Total number of frames received by the port.  
Total number of words transmitted by the port.  
Total number of words received by the port.  
Total Tx Frames  
Total Rx Frames  
Total Tx Words  
Total Rx Words  
6-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
Table 6-5. Port Statistics Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Total Link Resets  
Number of link-reset primitives the transmitted by the port.  
Total Offline  
Sequences  
Total number of offline sequences transmitted and received by  
the port.  
Flow Error Count  
Number of times a frame is received and all the switch ports  
receive buffers are full. The normal Fabric Login exchange of  
flow control credit should prevent this from occurring. The  
frame will be discarded.  
LP_TOV Timeout  
Count  
Number of loop timeouts.  
E_Port Connections  
Framing Errors  
Number of E_Port logins.  
Number of frames that were truncated due to a loss of sync or  
the frame didn't end with an EOF.  
6.1.3  
Port Information Data Window  
The Port Information data window displays port detail information for the selected  
port. To open the Port Information data window, choose the Port Info tab below  
the data window in the faceplate display.  
Table 6-6. Port Information Data Window Entries  
Entry  
Description  
Port Address  
Port Fibre Channel address.  
Administrative Port Mode  
The port mode before auto-configuration  
occurs.  
Operational Port Mode  
Administrative Port State  
Operational Port State  
The current port mode.  
Current port administrative state.  
Port operational state: online, offline,  
diagnostics, or down.  
Configured Administrative Port State  
Port administrative state that is stored in  
the switch configuration.  
Logged In  
Indicates whether logged in or not.  
Whether E_Port connection is enabled.  
Why E_Port is isolated.  
E Port Connection Status  
E Port Isolation Reason  
59048-02 A  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 – Managing Ports  
Displaying Port Information  
Q
Table 6-6. Port Information Data Window Entries (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
Port tuning indicator.  
MFS Mode  
I/O Stream Guard  
Whether RSCN suppression is enabled or  
disabled.  
Administrative Port Speed  
Operational Port Speed  
BB Credits  
The speed requested by the user.  
The speed actually being used by the port.  
Whether buffer-to-buffer credits have been  
set.  
Symbolic name  
Port symbolic name  
Ext Credits Requested  
Whether extended credits have been  
requested for ports.  
Medium  
The transceiver type.  
6.1.4  
Name Server Data Window  
The Name Server data window displays information about the port and the  
connected device. To open the Name Server data window, select one or more  
switches in the topology display and choose the Name Server tab below the data  
window. You can also open the Name Server data window in the faceplate display.  
Refer to Table 4-2 for a description of the Name Server data window entries.  
6-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
Q
6.2  
Configuring Ports  
The port settings or characteristics are configured using the Port Properties dialog  
shown in Figure 6-2. To open the Port Properties dialog, select one or more ports,  
open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
Figure 6-2. Port Properties Dialog  
The Port Properties dialog displays the switch name and the selected port(s). Use  
the Port Properties dialog to change the following parameters:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Port state  
Port speed  
Port mode  
Port buffer credits  
I/O Stream Guard (RSCN Suppression)  
Device scan  
59048-02 A  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
Q
6.2.1  
Changing Port Administrative States  
The port administrative state determines the operational state of a port. The port  
administrative state exists in two forms: the configured administrative state and  
the current administrative state.  
„
The configured administrative state is the state that is saved in the switch  
configuration and is preserved across switch resets. SANbox Manager  
always makes changes to the configured administrative state.  
„
The current administrative state is the state that is applied to the port for  
temporary purposes and is not preserved across switch resets. The current  
administrative state is set using the Set Port command. Refer to the ”Set  
Port Command” on page A-45.  
Table 6-7 describes the port administrative states. To change port administrative  
state, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties to open the Port Properties  
dialog.  
3.  
4.  
Choose the Port States radio button that corresponds to the port state you  
want.  
Choose the OK button to write the new port state to the switch.  
Table 6-7. Port Administrative States  
State  
Online  
Description  
Activates and prepares port to send data.  
Offline  
Test  
Prevents port from receiving signal and accepting a device login.  
Prepares port for testing and prevents the port from accepting a  
device login.  
Down  
Disables the port.  
6-10  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
Q
6.2.2  
Changing Port Speeds  
The SANbox2 switch ports are capable of transmitting and receiving at 1 or 2  
Gbps. The ports can be configured for either transmission speed or to sense the  
transmission speed of the device to which it is connected. Table 6-8 describes the  
port speeds. To change the port speed, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
Choose the radio button that corresponds to the port speed you want.  
Choose the Apply button to write the new port speed to the switch.  
Table 6-8. Port Speeds  
State  
Description  
Auto-Detect  
Matches the transmission speed of the connected device. This is the  
default.  
1Gb  
2Gb  
Sets the transmission speed to 1 Gbps.  
Sets the transmission speed to 2 Gbps.  
6.2.3  
Changing Port Modes  
The SANbox2 switch ports support both public and private devices as single  
devices or in loops. The ports can be configured to self-discover the proper mode  
to match the device or switch to which it is connected. Table 6-9 describes the port  
modes. To change the port mode, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select one or more ports in the faceplate display.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties to open the Port Properties  
dialog.  
3.  
4.  
Choose the Port Modes radio button that corresponds to the port mode you  
want.  
Choose the OK button to write the new port mode to the switch.  
59048-02 A  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
Q
Table 6-9. Port Modes  
Description  
State  
F_Port  
Fabric port - Supports a single public device (N_Port).  
FL_Port  
Fabric loop port - Self discovers a single device (N_Port) or a loop of up  
to 126 public devices (NL_Port).  
TL_Port  
Translated loop port - Supports a loop of up to 124 private target devices  
capable of communicating with up to 63 off-loop initiator devices. Refer to  
the installation guide for your switch for more information about TL_Ports.  
G_Port  
Generic port - Self discovers as an F_Port or an E_Port.  
GL_Port  
Generic loop port - Self discovers as an F_Port, FL_Port, or an E_Port.  
GL_Port is the default port mode. A single device on a public loop will  
attempt to configure as an F_Port first, then if that fails, as an FL_Port.  
Donor  
Donor port - Allows buffer credits to be used by another port.  
6.2.4  
Changing Buffer-to-Buffer Credits  
SANbox2 switches negotiate with other switches to resolve differences in the  
number of port buffer credits. However, certain non-FC-SW-2-compliant switches  
do not negotiate and will isolate when connected. To remedy this situation,  
disconnect the switches, then reconfigure the SANbox2 E_Port to match the  
number of port buffer credits on the other switch.  
Note:  
Changing buffer-to-buffer credits is necessary only for E_Ports that are  
connected to non-FC-SW-2-compliant switches. Contact your  
authorized maintenance provider for assistance in using this feature.  
To change buffer-to-buffer credits to permit interoperability with non-compliant  
switches, do the following:  
1.  
Determine the number of credits per port for the non-compliant switch:  
„
If the credits per port is equal to 12, stop here – no changes are  
needed.  
„
„
If the credits per port is less than 12, proceed to step 2.  
If the credits per port is greater than 12, you must extend credits for the  
affected SANbox2 port to increase the number of credits to match that  
of the non-standard switch. Refer to ”Extending Port Credits” on  
page 6-13.  
6-12  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
6 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
Q
2.  
Select the SANbox2 switch ports in the faceplate display that are to serve as  
links to the non-compliant switch.  
3.  
4.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Properties.  
In the E_Port BB Credits field, enter the number of credits per port of the  
non-compliant switch and choose the OK button.  
5.  
Connect the switches.  
6.2.5  
I/O Stream Guard  
The I/O Stream Guard feature suppresses the generation of Registered State  
Control Notification (RSCN) messages on a port basis. Choose Enable in the Port  
Properties dialog to suppress the generation of RSCN messages for the selected  
port.  
6.2.6  
Scan Device  
The Device Scan feature queries the connected device during login for FC-4  
descriptor information. Disable this parameter only if the scan creates a conflict  
with the connected device.  
6.2.7  
Extending Port Credits  
Each port is supported by a data buffer with a 12 credit capacity; that is, 12  
maximum sized frames. For fiber optic cables, this enables full bandwidth service  
over a distance of 20 kilometers at 1 Gbps (0.6 credits/Km), or 10 kilometers at 2  
Gbps (1.2 credits/Km). Longer distances can be spanned at full bandwidth by  
borrowing credits from designated donor ports thus pooling the buffer capacities.  
This is called credit extension. Each donor port contributes 11 credits to the pool  
from which the recipient ports can draw. For example, one donor port contributes  
11 credits to the pool from which a recipient draws for a total of 23 credits (11+12).  
This provides approximately 38 Km at 1 Gbps (23÷0.6) or 19 Km at 2 Gbps  
(23÷1.2).  
To extend credits, open the Port menu and select Ext Credit Wizard. The  
Extended Credit Wizard leads you through the following process to extend credits  
based on transmission distance requirements:  
1.  
Extended Distance on SANbox2: Explains the concepts and principles of  
extending port credits. Choose Next.  
2.  
Extended Distance Requirements: Specify speed and distance requirements  
for each port then choose Next.  
59048-02 A  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
6 – Managing Ports  
Configuring Ports  
Q
3.  
Designate Donor Ports: Select available ports and choose >> to move the  
port into the Selected Donor Port column shown in Figure 6-3. Match the  
number of ports needed with the number of designated donor ports. The port  
receiving the credits and the donor ports must reside on the same I/O blade.  
Choose Next.  
Figure 6-3. Designate Donor Ports  
4.  
Verify Requested Changes: Review the extended distance requests and the  
selected donor ports. Choose Finish.  
5.  
6.  
Apply changes: Redistribute credits as requested.  
Changes complete.  
Note:  
As credits are used, the Port Status LEDs on the corresponding donor  
ports illuminate continuously. In addition, donor port Activity LEDs will  
reflect the same traffic as the recipient port. Donor ports whose credits  
are being used are unavailable to devices that are connected to them.  
6.2.8  
Resetting a Port  
The Reset Port option reinitializes the port using the saved configuration. To reset  
a port, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
In the Faceplate Display, select the port(s) to be reset.  
Open the Port menu and select Reset Port.  
6-14  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6 – Managing Ports  
Testing Ports  
Q
6.3  
Testing Ports  
The port loopback tests verify correct port operation by sending a frame out  
through the loop, and then verifying that the frame received matches the frame  
that was sent. Only one port can be tested at a time for each type of test. The Port  
Loopback Test dialog shown in Figure 6-4 presents the following loopback tests:  
Figure 6-4. Port Loopback Test Dialog  
„
„
SerDes level (Internal) - The SerDes level test verifies port circuitry. The  
SerDes level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip  
and back to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the  
frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received.  
This test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore,  
disrupts communication.  
SFP level (External) - The SFP level test verifies port circuitry. The SFP  
level test sends a test frame from the ASIC through the SerDes chip,  
through the SFP transceiver fitted with an external loopback plug, and back  
to the ASIC for the selected ports. The port passes the test if the test frame  
that was sent by the ASIC matches the test frame that was received. This  
test requires that the port be in diagnostics mode, and therefore, disrupts  
communication.  
59048-02 A  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 – Managing Ports  
Testing Ports  
Q
„
Node-to-Node (Online) - The Node-to-Node test verifies communications  
between the port and its device node or device loop. The port being tested  
must be online and connected to a remote device. The port passes the test if  
the frame that was sent by the ASIC matches the frame that was received.  
This test does not disrupt communication on the selected port. This test  
requires that the port be online, and therefore, does not disrupt  
communication.  
To run the internal, external, or online port loopback test on a port, do the  
following:  
1.  
2.  
In the faceplate display, select the port to be tested.  
Open the Port menu and select Port Loopback Test to open the Port  
Loopback Test dialog.  
3.  
4.  
In the Test Selection area, choose the radio button for the type of loopback  
test to be run (Internal, External, or Online). If you choose the internal or  
external test, SANbox Manager will prompt you to confirm that the port state  
needs to be changed to the diagnostic state. Choose the OK button and  
SANbox Manager will change the port state.  
Enter the frame count, frame size, and choose a test pattern radio button.  
You may use the default pattern or enter an 8-digit pattern (hex). For online  
test, you can select the Terminate Test Upon Error check box if you want  
the test to stop should it encounter an error.  
5.  
6.  
Choose the Start Test button to begin the test. The Test Results area  
displays the test status, number of frames sent, and number of errors found.  
To test another port, open the Select Port pull-down menu and select  
another port (number) and test type (Internal, External, or Online) in the Test  
Selection area.  
7.  
Choose the Start Test button to begin the next test. Observe the results in  
the Test Results area.  
6-16  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A  
Command Line Interface  
Each switch contains a Telnet server. This server allows a Telnet client to establish  
a Telnet session with the switch to retrieve information or to configure parameters  
using the Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI enables you to perform a  
variety of fabric and switch management tasks through an Ethernet or a serial port  
connection.  
A.1  
Logging On to a Switch  
To log on to a switch using Telnet, open a command line window on the  
management workstation and enter the Telnet command followed by the switch IP  
address:  
/> telnet 123.45.67.89  
A Telnet window opens prompting you for a login. Enter an account name and  
password. Switches come from the factory with the following user account already  
defined:  
Account name: admin  
Password: password  
Authority: Admin  
This user account provides full access to the switch and its configuration. After  
planning your fabric management needs and creating your own user accounts,  
consider changing the password for this account. Refer to ”Commands” on  
page A-3 for more information about authority levels. Refer to the ”User  
Command” on page A-79 for information about creating user accounts.  
Note:  
A switch supports a combined maximum of 19 logins reserved as  
follows:  
„ 4 sessions for internal applications such as management server  
and SNMP  
„ 15 sessions for SANbox Manager inband and out-of-band logins,  
Application Programming Interface (API) inband and out-of-band  
logins and Telnet logins. Of these 15, there can be a combined  
maximum of 10 SANbox Manager and API logins. Additional logins  
will be refused.  
59048-02 A  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Command Syntax  
Q
A.2  
Command Syntax  
The command syntax is as follows:  
command  
keyword  
keyword [value]  
keyword [value1] [value2]  
The Command is followed by one or more keywords. Consider the following rules  
and conventions:  
„
„
„
Commands and keywords are lowercase and case sensitive.  
Commands with keywords require one of those keywords.  
Required keyword values appear in standard font: [value]. Optional values  
are shown in italics: [value].  
„
Underlined portions of the keyword in the command format indicate the  
abbreviated form that can be used. For example the Delete keyword can be  
abbreviated Del.  
A command-line completion feature makes entering and repeating commands  
easier. Table A-1 describes the command-line completion keystrokes.  
Table A-1. Command-Line Completion  
Keystroke  
Tab  
Effect  
Completes the command line. Enter at least one character and press  
the tab key to complete the command line. If more than one possibility  
exists, press the Tab key again to display all possibilities.  
Up Arrow  
Down Arrow  
Control-A  
Control-E  
Scrolls backward through the list of previously entered commands.  
Scrolls forward through the list of previously entered commands.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line  
Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.  
A-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Commands  
Q
A.3  
Commands  
The command set provides for User and Admin authority levels.  
„
User authority grants viewing access to the fabric and switches using the  
Show command and other read-only commands.  
„
Admin authority includes the User authority and grants permission to use the  
Admin command. The Admin Start command opens an admin session which  
provides access to the commands that change switch and fabric  
configurations. Refer to the ”Admin Command” on page A-4.  
The commands and their page numbers are listed by authority level in Table A-2.  
Table A-2. Commands Listed by Authority Level  
User Authority Commands  
Admin Authority Command  
Help  
(A-14)  
Admin  
(A-4)  
History  
Ping  
Ps  
Quit  
Show  
Show Config  
Show Log  
Show Perf  
Show Setup  
Uptime  
Whoami  
(A-15)  
(A-22)  
(A-23)  
(A-24)  
(A-50)  
(A-64)  
(A-67)  
(A-69)  
(A-71)  
(A-78)  
(A-81)  
Admin Session Commands  
Alias1  
(A-5)  
(A-7)  
Config1  
Date1  
(A-11)  
(A-12)  
(A-13)  
(A-16)  
(A-17)  
(A-19)  
(A-20)  
(A-21)  
(A-25)  
(A-30)  
(A-32)  
(A-42)  
(A-45)  
(A-46)  
(A-74)  
(A-75)  
(A-79)  
(A-82)  
(A-86)  
(A-89)  
Fallback  
Hardreset  
Hotreset  
Hotswap  
Image  
Lip  
Passwd  
Reset  
Set1  
Set Config  
Set Log  
Set Port  
Set Setup  
Shutdown  
Test  
User1  
Zone1  
Zoneset1  
Zoning1  
1Some keywords are available with User authority.  
59048-02 A  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Admin Command  
Q
Admin Command  
Opens and closes an Admin session. The Admin session provides commands  
that change the fabric and switch configurations. Only one Admin session can be  
open on the switch at any time. An inactive Admin session will time out after a  
period of time which can be changed using the Set Setup System command.  
Refer to the ”Set Setup Command” on page A-46.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
admin  
start (or begin)  
end (or stop)  
cancel  
Keywords start (or begin)  
Opens the admin session.  
end (or stop)  
Closes the admin session. The Hardreset, Hotreset, Logout, Shutdown, and  
Reset Switch commands will also end an admin session.  
cancel  
Terminates an Admin session opened by another user. Use this keyword with care  
because it terminates the Admin session without warning the other user and  
without saving pending changes.  
Notes  
Closing a Telnet window during an admin session does not release the session. In  
this case, you must either wait for the admin session to time out, or use the Admin  
Cancel command.  
Examples The following example shows how to open and close an Admin session:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #>  
.
.
.
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
A-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Alias Command  
Q
Alias Command  
Creates a named set of ports/devices. Aliases make it easier to assign a set of  
ports/devices to many zones. An alias can not have a zone or another alias as a  
member.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
alias  
add [alias] [members]  
copy [alias_source] [alias_destination]  
create [alias]  
delete [alias]  
list  
members [alias]  
remove [alias] [members]  
rename [alias_old] [alias_new]  
Keywords add [alias] [members]  
Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [members] to add to the alias named  
[alias]. An alias can have a maximum of 2000 members. [members] can have one  
of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs and  
port numbers are in decimal. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
The application verifies that the [alias] format is correct, but does not validate that  
such a port/device exists.  
copy [alias_source] [alias_destination]  
Creates a new alias named [alias_destination] and copies the membership into it  
from the alias given by [alias_source].  
create [alias]  
Creates an alias with the name given by [alias]. An alias name must begin with a  
letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 256 aliases.  
delete [alias]  
Deletes the specified alias given by [alias] from the zoning database. If the alias is  
a member of the active zone set, the alias will not be removed from the active  
zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.  
list  
Displays a list of all aliases. This keyword is valid for User authority and does not  
require a zoning edit session or an admin session.  
59048-02 A  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Alias Command  
Q
members [alias]  
Displays all members of the alias given by [alias]. This keyword is available with  
User authority and does not require a zoning edit session or an admin session.  
remove [alias] [members]  
Removes the ports/devices given by [members] from the alias given by [alias].  
[members] can have one of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs and  
port numbers are in decimal. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) for the device with  
the format xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
rename [alias_old] [alias_new]  
Renames the alias given by [alias_old] to the alias given by [alias_new].  
A-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
Q
Config Command  
Manages the Fibre Channel configurations on a switch. For information about  
setting the port and switch configurations, refer to the ”Set Config Command” on  
page A-32.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin for all keywords except List  
config  
activate [config]  
backup  
cancel  
copy [config_source] [config_destination]  
delete [config]  
edit [config]  
list  
restore  
save [config]  
Keywords activate [config]  
Activates the configuration given by [config]. If you omit the configuration, the  
currently active configuration is used. Only one configuration can be active at a  
time.  
backup  
Creates a file named configdata, which contains the system configuration  
information. To download this file, open an FTP session, log in with account name/  
password of “images” for both, and type “get configdata”. Refer to Examples.  
cancel  
Terminates the current configuration edit session without saving changes that  
were made.  
copy [config_source] [config_destination]  
Copies the configuration given by [config_source] to the configuration given by  
[config_destination]. The switch supports up to 10 configurations including the  
default configuration.  
delete [config]  
Deletes the specified configuration file where [config] is a file name.  
edit [config]  
Opens an edit session for the configuration given by [config]. If you omit the  
configuration name, the currently active configuration is used.  
list  
Displays a list of all available configurations. This keyword is available with User  
authority.  
59048-02 A  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
Q
restore  
Restores configuration settings to an out-of-band switch from a backup file named  
configdata, which must be first uploaded on the switch using FTP. You create the  
backup file using the Config Backup command. Use FTP to load the backup file  
on a switch, then enter the Config Restore command. Refer to Examples.  
Note:  
„ If the restore process changes the IP address, all management  
sessions are terminated. Use the Set Setup System command to  
return the IP configuration to the values you want. Refer to the ”Set  
Setup Command” on page A-46.  
„ Configuration archive files created with the SANbox Manager  
Archive function are not compatible with the Config Restore  
command.  
save [config]  
Saves changes made during a configuration edit session in the configuration  
given by [config]. If you omit the configuration name value, the configuration you  
chose for the Config Edit command is used. The switch supports up to 10  
configurations including the default configuration.  
Notes  
If you edit the active configuration, changes will be held in suspense until you  
reactivate the configuration or activate another configuration.  
Examples The following shows an example of how to open and close a Config Edit session:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
.
.
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> config cancel  
Configuration mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
A-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
Q
The following is an example of how to create a backup file (configdata) and  
download the file to the workstation.  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config backup  
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
SANbox2 #> exit  
#>ftp symbolic_name or ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> get configdata  
ftp> quit  
59048-02 A  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Config Command  
Q
The following is an example of how to upload a configuration backup file  
(configdata) from the workstation to the switch, and then restore the configuration.  
#> ftp symbolic_name or ip_address  
user: images  
password: images  
ftp> bin  
ftp> put configdata  
ftp> quit  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config restore  
The switch will be reset after restoring the configuration.  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
Alarm Msg: [Tue Jun 10 09:25:56.938 2003][A1005.0021][SM][Configuration is being  
restored - this could take several minutes !]  
Alarm Msg: [Tue Jun 10 09:26:19.266 2003][A1000.000A][SM][The switch will be  
reset in 3 seconds due to a config restore]  
SANbox2 (admin) #>  
Alarm Msg: [Tue Jun 10 09:26:22.296 2003][A1000.0005][SM][The switch is being  
reset]  
Good bye.  
A-10  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Date Command  
Q
Date Command  
This command displays or sets the system date and time. To set the date and time  
the information string must be provided in this format: MMDDhhmmCCYY. The  
new date and time takes effect immediately.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin to change the date; User to display the date.  
date  
[MMDDhhmmCCYY]  
Keywords [MMDDhhmmCCYY]  
Specifies the date – this requires an admin session. If you omit  
[MMDDhhmmCCYY], the current date is displayed – this is available with User  
authority.  
Examples The following is an example of the Date command:  
SANbox2 #> date  
Mon Apr 07 07:51:24 2003  
59048-02 A  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Fallback Command  
Q
Fallback Command  
Assigns the pending firmware status back and forth between the active and  
inactive firmware images stored in switch memory.  
Authority  
Admin  
Syntax  
Notes  
fallback  
„
The Show Switch command displays the two firmware images, active  
firmware, inactive firmware, and pending firmware versions.  
„
After executing the Fallback command, reset the switch to activate the  
pending firmware. Use the Hotreset command for a non-disruptive  
activation. Otherwise, you can use the Reset Switch command.  
Examples The following is an example of the Fallback command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> fallback  
Reverting to previous software image. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
A-12  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Hardreset Command  
Q
Hardreset Command  
Resets the switch and performs a power-on self test. This reset activates the  
pending firmware and disrupts traffic.  
Authority  
Admin  
Syntax  
Notes  
hardreset  
To reset the switch without a power-on self test, refer to the ”Reset Command” on  
page A-25.  
To reset the switch without disrupting traffic, refer to the ”Hotreset Command” on  
page A-16.  
59048-02 A  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Help Command  
Q
Help Command  
Displays a brief description of the specified command and its keywords.  
User  
help [command] [keyword]  
Authority  
Syntax  
Keywords [command]  
Displays a summary of the command given by [command] and its keywords. If you  
omit [command], the system displays all available commands from which to  
choose.  
[keyword]  
Displays a summary of the keyword given by [keyword] belonging to the  
command given by [command]. If you omit [keyword], the system displays the  
available keywords for the specified command.  
all  
Displays a list of all available commands (including command variations).  
Examples The following is an example of the Help Set command:  
SANbox2 #> help set  
set SET_OPTIONS  
There are many attributes that can be set.  
Type help with one of the following to get more information:  
set alarm  
set beacon  
set blade  
set config blade  
set config port  
set config ports  
set config switch  
set config threshold  
set config zoning  
set log  
set pagebreak  
set port  
set setup snmp  
set setup system  
set switch  
The following is an example of the Help Set Beacon command:  
SANbox2 #> help set beacon  
set beacon On | Off  
This command allows the LEDs on the front of the switch to flash.  
The On option will start and the Off option will stop the flashing.  
A-14  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
History Command  
Q
History Command  
Displays a numbered list of the previously entered commands from which you can  
re-execute selected commands.  
Authority  
User  
Syntax  
Notes  
history  
Use the History command to provide context for the ! command:  
„
„
Enter ![command] to re-enter the most recent execution of that command.  
Enter ![line number] to re-execute the corresponding command from the  
History display  
„
Enter ![partial command string] to re-execute a command that matches the  
command string.  
„
Enter !! to re-execute the most recent command.  
Examples The following is an example of the History command:  
SANbox2 #> history  
1 show switch  
2 date  
3 help set  
4 history  
SANbox2 #> !3  
help set  
set SET_OPTIONS  
There are many attributes that can be set.  
Type help with one of the following to get more information:  
set alarm  
set beacon  
set blade  
set config blade  
set config port  
set config ports  
set config switch  
set config threshold  
set config zoning  
set log  
set pagebreak  
set port  
set setup snmp  
set setup system  
set switch  
59048-02 A  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Hotreset Command  
Q
Hotreset Command  
Resets the switch for the purpose of activating the pending firmware without  
disrupting traffic. This command terminates all management sessions and saves  
all configuration information. After the pending firmware is activated, the  
configuration is recovered. This process takes less than 80 seconds.  
Authority  
Admin  
Syntax  
Notes  
hotreset  
Non-disruptive firmware activation is possible under the following conditions:  
„
The active firmware must be version 2.0 or greater and the new firmware to  
be activated must be a version greater than 2.0.  
„
The fabric must be stable. This means that no configuration changes can be  
in progress, and switch and device connections are not being added or  
removed. Furthermore, a non-disruptive activation cannot occur if any port in  
the fabric is in the diagnostic operational state.  
This command clears the event log and all counters.  
A-16  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Hotswap Command  
Q
Hotswap Command  
This command prompts you step-by-step through the procedure to replace an I/O  
blade, insert an I/O blade, or remove an I/O blade while the switch is running.  
Authority  
Admin  
Syntax  
Notes  
hotswap  
The Hotswap command automatically starts and ends an Admin session in the  
presence of admin authority.  
Always perform the hot swap procedure as prompted, otherwise the switch will  
become unresponsive. For example, if you install a blade in the wrong slot,  
proceed as though you no mistake had been made and follow the rest of the  
procedures. When complete, perform the operation again with the correct slot. If  
the switch becomes unresponsive, you must power cycle the switch.  
After you select an I/O blade to remove and press the Enter key, all Port Status  
LEDs will flash green to identify the selected I/O blade.  
After you install an I/O blade and press the Enter key, the Port Status LEDs will  
flash amber in sequence by port number, then the Port Status LEDs will flash  
green.  
Examples The following is an example of the Hotswap Replace command:  
SANbox2 #> hotswap  
This command will guide you through the hotswap process. If this process is not  
followed exactly, then a seamless transition cannot be guaranteed and a switch  
power cycle will be required.  
The following procedures may be performed:  
1) Replace installed IO blade  
2) Insert an IO blade  
3) Remove an IO blade  
4) Exit this process  
Which procedure above do you want to initiate? (1-4): [4] 1  
Blade Slot  
Type  
Number  
----- ------  
IO-0  
IO-1  
IO-2  
IO-3  
IO-4  
IO-5  
IO-6  
IO-7  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
Which IO blade (indexed by slot number) do you want  
59048-02 A  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Hotswap Command  
Q
to replace? (1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9): [1] 6  
o Remove all connections from the IO blade in slot 6.  
o Remove the IO blade in slot 6 from the chassis.  
Have the above operations been completed? (y = proceed / n = cancel) y  
Hotswap IO blade removal sub-procedure successfully completed.  
If you wish to continue with the replacement procedure please note  
that after the blade has been successfully inserted:  
o Diagnostics will be performed on the IO blade.  
o The diagnostics results will be posted.  
o The IO blade will be initialized to its configured state.  
o All ports on the blade will be initialized to their configured state.  
Do you want to continue with the replacement procedure? (y=proceed/n=cancel) y  
o Insert the replacement IO blade into the chassis in slot 6.  
o Attach all connections, if any, to the IO blade in slot 6.  
Have the above operations been completed? (y = proceed / n = cancel) y  
Hotswap IO blade process successfully completed.  
Diagnostics has been run on the IO blade in slot 6: Passed  
WARNING: Multiple alarms were posted during this process.  
Execute the 'show alarm' command to see all alarms.  
SANbox2 (admin) #>  
Alarm Msg: [9][Fri Jun 13 01:14:42.468 2003][A3015.0001][SM][I/O blade in slot 6  
has been inserted  
A-18  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Image Command  
Q
Image Command  
Manages and installs switch firmware.  
Admin  
image  
cleanup  
Authority  
Syntax  
fetch [account_name] [ip_address] [file_source] [file_destination]  
list  
unpack [file]  
Keywords cleanup  
Removes all firmware image files from the switch. All firmware image files are  
removed automatically each time the switch is reset.  
fetch [account_name] [ip_address] [file_source] [file_destination]  
Retrieves image file given by [file_source] and stores it on the switch with the file  
name given by [file_destination]. The image file is retrieved from the device with  
the IP address given by [ip_address] and an account name given by  
[account_name]. If an account name needs a password to access the device, the  
system will prompt you for it.  
list  
Displays the list of image files that reside on the switch.  
unpack [file]  
Installs the firmware file given by [file]. After unpacking the file, a message  
appears confirming successful unpacking. The switch must be reset for the new  
firmware to take effect.  
Notes  
To provide consistent performance throughout the fabric, ensure that all switches  
are running the same version of firmware.  
Use the Hotreset command to perform a non-disruptive activation for firmware  
versions that follow version 2.0.  
59048-02 A  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Lip Command  
Q
Lip Command  
Reinitializes the specified loop port.  
Admin  
lip [port_number]  
Authority  
Syntax  
Keywords [port_number]  
The number of the port to be reinitialized.  
Examples The following is an example of the Lip command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> lip 2  
A-20  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Passwd Command  
Q
Passwd Command  
Changes a user account’s password.  
Admin to change another account’s password; User to change your own.  
passwd [account_name]  
Authority  
Syntax  
Keywords [account_name]  
The user account name. You must open an admin session to change the  
password for an account name other than your own. If you omit [account_name],  
you will be prompted to change the password for the current account name.  
Examples The following is an example of the Passwd command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> passwd user2  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account OLD password  
:
account NEW password (4-20 chars) :  
please confirm account NEW password:  
password has been changed.  
59048-02 A  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Ping Command  
Q
Ping Command  
Initiates an attempt to communicate with another switch in the fabric and reports  
the result.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
Ping  
ip_address  
Keywords ip_address  
The IP address of the switch to query.  
Examples The following is an example of a successful Ping command:  
SANbox2 #> ping 10.20.11.57  
Ping command issued. Waiting for response...  
SANbox2 #>  
Response successfully received from 10.20.11.57.  
This following is an example of an unsuccessful Ping command:  
SANbox2 #> ping 10.20.10.100  
Ping command issued. Waiting for response...  
No response from 10.20.10.100. Unreachable.  
A-22  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Ps Command  
Q
Ps Command  
Displays current system process information.  
User  
ps  
Authority  
Syntax  
Examples The following is an example of the Ps command:  
SANbox2 #> ps  
PID PPID %CPU  
TIME  
ELAPSED COMMAND  
338  
339  
340  
341  
342  
343  
344  
345  
346  
347  
348  
349  
350  
351  
352  
404  
405  
406  
327 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:35 cns  
327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:35 ens  
327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:35 dlog  
327 0.1 00:05:35 3-01:18:35 ds  
327 0.2 00:11:29 3-01:18:35 mgmtApp  
327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:35 fc2  
327 0.0 00:02:16 3-01:18:35 nserver  
327 0.0 00:02:44 3-01:18:35 mserver  
327 0.8 00:35:12 3-01:18:35 util  
327 0.0 00:00:29 3-01:18:35 snmpservicepath  
327 0.0 00:02:46 3-01:18:34 eport  
327 0.0 00:00:21 3-01:18:34 PortApp  
327 5.6 04:08:24 3-01:18:34 port_mon  
327 0.0 00:01:38 3-01:18:34 zoning  
327 0.0 00:00:01 3-01:18:34 diagApp  
327 0.0 00:00:04 3-01:18:27 snmpd  
327 0.0 00:00:02 3-01:18:27 snmpmain  
405 0.0 00:00:00 3-01:18:26 snmpmain  
59048-02 A  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Quit Command  
Q
Quit Command  
Closes the Telnet session.  
Authority  
User  
Syntax  
Notes  
quit, exit, or logout  
You can also enter Control-D to close the Telnet session.  
A-24  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
Q
Reset Command  
Resets the switch configuration parameters. If you omit the keyword, the default is  
Reset Switch.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
reset  
blade [slot_number]  
config [config_name]  
factory  
port [port_number]  
snmp  
switch (default)  
system  
zoning  
Keywords blade [slot_number]  
Resets the I/O or cross-connect blade that occupies the slot given by  
[slot_number]. I/O blade slot numbers are 1–4 and 6–9; cross-connect slot  
numbers are 11–12.  
config [config_name]  
Resets the configuration given by [config_name] to the factory default values for  
switch, port, alarm threshold, and zoning configuration. If [config_name] does not  
exist on the switch, a configuration with that name will be created. If you omit  
[config_name], the active configuration is reset. You must activate the  
configuration for the changes to take effect. Refer to Table A-3 through Table A-6  
for switch, port, and alarm threshold configuration default values.  
factory  
Resets switch configuration, port configuration, alarm threshold configuration,  
zoning configuration, SNMP configuration, system configuration, and zoning to  
the factory default values. The switch configuration is activated automatically.  
Refer to Table A-3 through Table A-8.  
port [port_number]  
Reinitializes the port given by [port_number]. Ports are numbered beginning  
with 0.  
snmp  
Resets the SNMP configuration settings to the factory default values. Refer to  
Table A-7 for SNMP configuration default values.  
switch  
Resets the switch without a power-on self test. This reset disrupts traffic and  
activates the pending firmware. This command also closes all management  
sessions. This is the default. To reset the switch with a power-on self test, refer to  
the ”Hardreset Command” on page A-13. To reset the switch without disrupting  
traffic, refer to the ”Hotreset Command” on page A-16.  
59048-02 A  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
Q
system  
Resets the system configuration settings to the factory default values. Refer to  
Table A-8 for system configuration default values.  
zoning  
Clears the zoning database and deactivates the active zone set. The zoning  
configuration values (autosave, default visibility) remain unchanged.  
Notes  
The following tables specify the various factory default settings:  
Table A-3. Switch Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Admin State  
Online  
True  
Broadcast Enabled  
InbandEnabled  
True  
Domain ID  
1 (0x Hex)  
False  
Domain ID Lock  
Symbolic Name  
SANbox2  
10000  
2000  
R_A_TOV  
E_D_TOV  
Principal Priority  
Configuration Description  
Configuration Last Saved By  
Configuration Last Saved On  
254  
QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
Initial  
Initial  
Table A-4. Port Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Admin State  
Link Speed  
Port Type  
Online  
Auto  
GL  
ISL Security  
Symbolic Name  
ALFairness  
Any  
Port  
False  
True  
DeviceScanEnabled  
A-26  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
Q
Table A-4. Port Configuration Defaults (Continued)  
Parameter  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
Default  
False  
False  
0
ARB_FF  
InteropCredit  
ExtCredit  
0
FANEnable  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
MFS_TOV  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
True  
False  
True  
10  
True  
False  
Disabled  
False  
False  
IOStreamGuard  
VIEnable  
CheckAlps  
Table A-5. Alarm Threshold Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
False  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
25  
1
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
200  
0
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
2
FallingTrigger  
0
SampleWindow  
10  
59048-02 A  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
Q
Table A-5. Alarm Threshold Configuration Defaults (Continued)  
Parameter  
Default  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
5
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
5
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
True  
100  
5
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
Table A-6. Zoning Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
FC-SW-2 AutoSave  
Default  
True  
All  
Table A-7. SNMP Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
<syscontact undefined>  
Contact  
Location  
<sysLocation undefined>  
Description  
QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
Trap [1-5] Address  
Trap [1-5] Port  
Trap [1-5] Severity  
Trap [1-5] Version  
Trap [1-5] Enabled  
ObjectID  
Trap 1: 10.0.0.254; Traps 2–5: 0.0.0.0  
162  
Warning  
2
False  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.12  
A-28  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Reset Command  
Q
Table A-7. SNMP Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
AuthFailureTrap  
Default  
False  
True  
ProxyEnabled  
Table A-8. System Configuration Defaults  
Parameter  
Default  
Ethernet Network Discovery  
Ethernet Network IP Address  
Ethernet Network IP Mask  
Ethernet Gateway Address  
Fibre Channel Network Discovery  
Fibre Channel Network IP Address  
Fibre Channel Network IP Mask  
Fibre Channel Gateway Address  
Admin Timeout  
Static  
10.0.0.1  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
Static  
0.0.0.0  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
30 minutes  
False  
SecurityEnabled  
LocalLogEnabled  
True  
RemotelogEnabled  
False  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
Temp Monitoring Warning  
Temp Monitoring Failure  
Temp Failure Port Shutdown  
10.0.0.254  
65  
70  
False  
59048-02 A  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
Q
Set Command  
Sets a variety of switch parameters.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin for all keywords except Alarm Clear, Beacon, and Pagebreak which are  
available with User authority.  
set  
alarm clear  
beacon [state]  
blade [slot_number] [state]  
config [option]  
log [option]  
pagebreak [state]  
port [option]  
setup [option]  
switch [state]  
Keywords alarm clear  
Clears the alarm log. This keyword is available with User authority.  
beacon [state]  
Enables or disables the flashing of the Port Status LEDs according to [state]. This  
keyword is available with User authority. [state] can be one of the following:  
on  
Enables the flashing beacon.  
off  
Disables the flashing beacon.  
blade [slot_number] [state]  
Temporarily changes the administrative state given by [state] for all ports on the I/  
O or cross-connect blade occupying the slot given by [slot_number]. The previous  
Set Config Switch settings are restored after a switch reset or a reactivation of a  
switch configuration. [slot_number] is a number in the ranges 1–4 and 6–9. [state]  
can be one of the following:  
online  
Places the I/O blade and its ports online.  
offline  
Places the I/O blade and its ports offline.  
diagnostics  
Prepares the I/O blade and its ports for testing.  
down  
Disables the I/O blade and its ports.  
config [option]  
Sets switch, blade, port, alarm threshold, and zoning configuration parameters.  
Refer to the ”Set Config Command” on page A-32.  
A-30  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Command  
Q
log [option]  
Specifies the type of entries to be entered in the event log. Refer to the ”Set Log  
Command” on page A-42.  
pagebreak [state]  
Specifies how much information is displayed on the screen at a time according to  
the value given by [state]. This keyword is available with User authority. [state] can  
be one of the following:  
on  
Limits the display of information to 20 lines at a time. The page break  
functions affects the following commands: Alias (List, Members), Show  
(Alarm, Log), Zone (List, Members), Zoneset (List, Zones), Zoning (Active,  
List).  
off  
Allows continuous display of information without a break.  
port [option]  
Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch  
reset or new configuration activation. Refer to the ”Set Port Command” on  
page A-45.  
setup [option]  
Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. Refer to the ”Set Setup  
Command” on page A-46.  
switch [state]  
Temporarily changes the administrative state for all ports on the switch to the state  
given by [state]. The previous Set Config Switch settings are restored after a  
switch reset or a reactivation of a switch configuration. [state] can be one of the  
following:  
online  
Places all ports online  
offline  
Places all ports offline.  
diagnostics  
Prepares all ports for testing.  
Examples The following examples enables and disables the beacon:  
SANbox2 #> set beacon on  
Command succeeded.  
SANbox2 $> set beacon off  
Command succeeded.  
59048-02 A  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
Set Config Command  
Sets switch, blade, port, alarm threshold, and zoning configuration parameters.  
Authority  
Admin authority and a Config Edit session  
Syntax  
set config  
blade [slot_number]  
port [port_number]  
ports [port_number]  
switch  
threshold  
zoning  
Keywords blade [slot_number]  
Initiates an edit session in which to change configured administrative state for an  
I/O or cross-connect blade occupying the slot given by [slot_number]. If you omit  
[slot_number], the system begins with slot 1 and proceeds in order through slot  
12. Slots 1–4 and 6–9 are I/O blades; slots 11–12 are cross-connect blades. Enter  
a new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Enter “q” to end the configuration for one blade, or “qq” to end the configuration for  
all blades.  
port [port_number]  
Initiates an edit session in which to change configuration parameters for the port  
number given by [port_number]. If you omit [port_number], the system begins with  
port 0 and proceeds in order through the last port. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Enter “q” to end the configuration for one port, or “qq” to end the configuration for  
all ports. Table A-9 describes the port parameters.  
ports [port_number]  
Initiates an editing session in which to change configuration parameters for all  
ports based on the configuration for the port given by [port_number]. If you omit  
[port_number], port 0 is used. For each parameter, enter a new value or press the  
Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets. Enter “q” to end the  
configuration. Table A-9 describes the port parameters.  
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
Port administrative state: online, offline,  
diagnostics, or down. The default is online.  
Transmission speed: 1Gb/sec, 2 Gb/sec,  
or Auto. The default is Auto.  
Port mode: TL, GL, G, F, FL, Donor. The  
default is GL.  
A-32  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
ISLSecurity  
E_Port security. Determines which  
switches a port will establish a link with.  
„ Any - link with any FC-SW-2 compliant  
switch. This is the default.  
„ Ours - link only with an FC-SW-2  
compliant QLogic switch.  
„ None - reject the link.  
SymbolicPortName  
ALFairness  
Descriptive name. The default is Port.  
Arbitration loop fairness. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) the switch’s priority to  
arbitrate on the loop. The default is False.  
DeviceScanEnabled  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the  
scanning of the connected device for FC-4  
descriptor information during login. The  
default is True.  
Enables (False) or disables (True) the  
immediate transmission of RSCN  
messages when communication between  
a port and its device is interrupted. If  
enabled, the RSCN message is queued  
for 200 ms. The default is False. This  
parameter is ignored if IOStreamGuard is  
enabled.  
ARB_FF  
Send ARB_FF (True) instead of IDLEs  
(False) on the loop. The default is False.  
InteropCredit  
Interoperability credit. The number of  
buffer-to-buffer credits per port. 0 means  
the default (12) is unchanged.  
ExtCredit  
Extended credits. The number of port  
buffer credits that this port can acquire  
from donor ports. The default is 0.  
FANEnable  
Fabric address notification. Enables (True)  
or disables (False) the communication of  
the FL_Port address, port name, and node  
name to the logged-in NL_Port. The  
default is True.  
59048-02 A  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
Table A-9. Set Config Port Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
Link control frame preference routing.  
Enables (True) or disables (False)  
preferred routing of frames with R_CTL =  
1100 (Class 2 responses). The default is  
False. Enabling LCFEnable will disable  
MFSEnable.  
Multi-Frame Sequence bundling. Prevents  
(True) or allows (False) the interleaving of  
frames in a sequence. The default is True.  
Enabling MFSEnable disables LCFEnable  
and VIEnable.  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
Management server enable. Enables  
(True) or disables (False) management  
server on this port. The default is True.  
Loop circuit closure prevention. Enables  
(True) or disables (False) the loop’s ability  
to remain in the open state indefinitely.  
True reduces the amount of arbitration on a  
loop when there is only one device on the  
loop. The default is False.  
IOStreamGuard  
I/O Stream Guard. Enable (Enable) or  
disables (Disable) the suppression of  
RSCN messages. The default is Disable.  
VIEnable  
Enables (True) or disables (False) VI  
preference routing. The default is False.  
Enabling VIEnable will disable  
MFSEnable.  
CheckAlps  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the  
loop’s ability to close more often. Enable  
only for TL_Ports that are having problems  
with a specific device. The default is False.  
A-34  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
switch  
Initiates an editing session in which to change switch configuration settings. The  
system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value.  
For each parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the  
current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-10. Set Config Switch Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
AdminState  
Switch administrative state: online, offline,  
or diagnostics. The default is Online.  
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
Broadcast. Enables (True) or disables  
(False) forwarding of broadcast frames.  
The default is True.  
Inband management. Enables (True) or  
disables (False) the ability to manage the  
switch over an ISL. The default is True.  
DefaultDomainID  
DomainIDLock  
Default domain ID. The default is 1.  
Prevents (True) or allows (False) dynamic  
reassignment of the domain ID. The  
default is False.  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
Descriptive name. The default is  
SANbox2.  
Resource Allocation Timeout Value. The  
number of milliseconds the switch waits to  
allow two ports to allocate enough  
resources to establish a link. The default is  
10000.  
E_D_TOV  
Error Detect Timeout Value. The number  
of milliseconds a port is to wait for errors to  
clear. The default is 2000.  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
The priority used in the FC-SW-2 principal  
switch selection algorithm. 1 is high, 255 is  
low. The default is 254.  
The name for the configuration. The  
default is undefined.  
59048-02 A  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
Table A-10. Set Config Switch Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
FC-SW-2 Compliant  
Description  
Propagates just the active zone set  
throughout the fabric (True, compliant) or  
the entire zoning database (False, non-  
compliant). The default is True.  
LegacyAddressFormat  
Available only when the FC-SW-2  
Compliant parameter is False, this  
parameter enables (True) or disables  
(False) the use of legacy address  
formatting for interoperating with non-FC-  
SW-2 switches. Refer to ”FC-SW-2  
Compliant” on page A-36. The default is  
False.  
threshold  
Initiates a configuration session by which to generate and log alarms for selected  
events. The system displays each event, its thresholds, and sampling interval one  
line at a time and prompts you for a value. For each parameter, enter a new value  
or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets. These  
parameters must be saved in a configuration and activated before they will take  
effect. Refer to the ”Config Command” on page A-7 for information about saving  
and activating a configuration. Table A-11 describes the Set Config Threshold  
parameters. The switch will down a port if an alarm condition is not cleared within  
three consecutive sampling intervals (by default 30 seconds). Reset the port to  
bring it back online. An alarm is cleared when the threshold monitoring detects  
that the error rate has fallen below the falling threshold.  
Table A-11. Set Config Threshold Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Threshold Monitoring Enabled  
Master enable/disable parameter for all events.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation  
of all enabled event alarms. The default is False.  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
The event type enable/disable parameter.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation  
of alarms for each of the following events:  
„ CRC errors  
„ Decode errors  
„ ISL connection count  
„ Device login errors  
„ Device logout errors  
„ Loss-of-signal errors  
A-36  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
Table A-11. Set Config Threshold Parameters (Continued)  
Parameter  
Rising Trigger  
Description  
The event count above which a rising threshold  
alarm is logged. The switch will not generate  
another rising threshold alarm for that event until  
the count descends below the falling threshold  
and again exceeds the rising threshold.  
Falling Trigger  
The event count below which a falling threshold  
alarm is logged. The switch will not generate  
another falling threshold alarm for that event until  
the count exceeds the rising threshold and  
descends again below the falling threshold.  
Sample Window  
The period of time in seconds in which to count  
events.  
zoning  
Initiates an editing session in which to change switch zoning attributes. The  
system displays each parameter one line at a time and prompts you for a value.  
For each parameter, enter a new value or press the Enter key to accept the  
current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-12. Set Config Zoning Parameters  
Parameter  
FC-SW-2 AutoSave  
Description  
Available only when the FC-SW-2  
Compliant parameter is True, this  
parameter enables (True) or disables  
(False) the saving of changes to active  
zone set in the switch’s permanent  
memory. Refer to ”FC-SW-2 Compliant” on  
page A-36. The default is True.  
Default  
Enables (All) or disables (None)  
communication among the switch’s ports/  
devices and the fabric in the absence of an  
active zone set. The default is All.  
59048-02 A  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
Examples The following is an example of the Set Config Blade command:  
SANbox2-64 108 (admin-config) #> set config blade 1  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the default value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'qq' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Configuring Blade in Slot Number: 1  
---------------------------------  
AdminState  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics, 4=Down) [Online]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
A-38  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Set Config Port command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config port 1  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Configuring Port Number: 1  
------------------------  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
PortType  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics, 4=Down)  
(1=1Gb/s, 2=2Gb/s, 3=Auto)  
(TL / GL / G / F / FL / Donor)  
(Any / Ours / None)  
[Online]  
[Auto ]  
[GL  
]
]
ISLSecurity  
SymPortName  
ALFairness  
[Any  
(string, max=32 chars)  
[Port2 ]  
[False ]  
[True  
(True / False)  
DeviceScanEnable (True / False)  
ForceOfflineRSCN (True / False)  
]
]
[False  
ARB_FF  
(True / False)  
[False ]  
InteropCredit (decimal value, 0-255)  
[0  
[0  
]
]
ExtCredit  
FANEnable  
LCFEnable  
MFSEnable  
MSEnable  
NoClose  
(dec value, increments of 11, non-loop only)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
[True ]  
[False ]  
[Disable]  
[False ]  
[False ]  
IOStreamGuard (Enable / Disable)  
VIEnable  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
CheckAlps  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
59048-02 A  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Set Config Switch command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config switch  
A list of attributes with formatting and default values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
AdminState  
(1=Online, 2=Offline, 3=Diagnostics) [Online  
]
]
]
]
]
BroadcastEnable  
InbandEnabled  
DefaultDomainID  
DomainIDLock  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
(True / False)  
[False  
[False  
[11  
(True / False)  
(decimal value, 1-239)  
(True / False)  
[True  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(decimal value, 100-100000 msec)  
(decimal value, 10-20000 msec)  
[SANbox2 switch]  
[10000  
[2000  
[254  
[
]
]
]
]
]
E_D_TOV  
PrincipalPriority (decimal value, 1-255)  
ConfigDescription (string, max=32 chars)  
FC-SW-2 Compliant (True / False)  
[True  
The following is an example of the Set Config Threshold command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config threshold  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
(True / False)  
[False]  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True]  
[25 ]  
[1 ]  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled (True / False)  
[True]  
[200 ]  
[0 ]  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
A-40  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Config Command  
Q
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]  
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True]  
[2 ]  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
[0 ]  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]  
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True]  
[5 ]  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
[1 ]  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]  
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True]  
[5 ]  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
FallingTrigger  
[1 ]  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]  
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
(True / False)  
[True]  
(decimal value, 1-1000)  
(decimal value, 0-1000)  
[100 ]  
[5 ]  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
(decimal value, 1-1000 sec) [10 ]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
The following is an example of the Set Config Zoning command.  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> config edit  
SANbox2 (admin-config) #> set config zoning  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list press 'q'  
or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
FC-SW-2 AutoSave (True / False) [True]  
Default  
(All / None)  
[All ]  
Finished configuring attributes.  
This configuration must be saved (see config save command) and  
activated (see config activate command) before it can take effect.  
To discard this configuration use the config cancel command.  
59048-02 A  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
Q
Set Log Command  
Specifies the type of entries to be entered in the event log. The log consists of six  
files contained on the switch: logfile, and logfile.1 – logfile.5. Each file can hold a  
maximum of 200 entries. The switch begins writing entries to logfile. When logfile  
is full, its contents are moved into logfile.1, and logging continues in logfile. When  
logfile.1 is full, its contents are moved into logfile.2, and so on. When logfile.5  
becomes full, its contents are discarded. Log entries are created for ports,  
components, and event severity levels.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
set log  
archive  
clear  
component [list]  
level [level]  
port [port_list]  
restore  
save  
start (default)  
stop  
Keywords archive  
Concatenates the individual event log files (logfile, logfile.1, logfile.2, logfile.3,  
logfile.3, logfile.4, logfile.5) and stores the result in new file named logfile that is  
maintained in another part of switch memory where it can be downloaded from the  
switch using FTP. To download logfile, open an FTP session, log in with account  
name/password of “images” for both, and type “get logfile”.  
clear  
Clears all log entries.  
component [list]  
Specifies one or more components to monitor for events. Use spaces to delimit  
values in the list. Choose one or more of the following values:  
All  
Monitors all components. To maintain optimal switch performance, do not  
use this setting with the Level keyword set to Info.  
Blade  
Monitors modular circuit boards in cabinets, racks, and high-port-count  
switches.  
Chassis  
Monitors chassis hardware components such as fans and power supplies.  
Eport  
Monitors all E_Ports.  
A-42  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
Q
Mgmtserver  
Monitors management server status.  
Nameserver  
Monitors name server status.  
None  
Monitor none of the component events.  
Other  
Monitors other miscellaneous events.  
Port  
Monitors all port events  
Switch  
Monitors switch management events.  
Zoning  
Monitors zoning conflict events.  
level [level]  
Specifies the severity level given by [level] to use in monitoring events for the  
specified components or ports. [level] can be one of the following values:  
Critical  
Monitors critical events.  
Warn  
Monitors warning events.  
Info  
Monitors informational events. To maintain optimal switch performance, do  
not use this setting with the Component keyword set to All.  
None  
Monitors none of the severity levels.  
port [port_list]  
Specifies one or more ports to monitor for events. Choose one of the following  
values:  
[port_list]  
Specifies port or ports to monitor. Use spaces to delimit values in the list.  
Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
All  
Specifies all ports.  
None  
Disables monitoring on all ports.  
restore  
Restores and saves the port, component, and level settings to the default values.  
59048-02 A  
A-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Log Command  
Q
save  
Saves the log settings for the component, level, and port. These settings remain  
in effect after a switch reset. The log settings can be viewed using the Show Log  
Settings command. To export log entries to a file, use the Set Log Archive  
command.  
start  
Starts the logging of events based on the Port, Component, and Level keywords  
assigned to the current configuration. The logging continues until you enter the  
Set Log Stop command.  
stop  
Stops logging of events.  
Notes  
To maintain optimal switch performance, do not set the Component keyword to All  
and the Level keyword to Info at the same time.  
A-44  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Port Command  
Q
Set Port Command  
Sets port state and speed for the specified port temporarily until the next switch  
reset or new configuration activation. This command also clears port counters.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
set port [port_number]  
bypass [alpa]  
clear  
enable  
speed [transmission_speed]  
state [state]  
Keywords [port_number]  
Specifies the port. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
bypass [alpa]  
Sends a Loop Port Bypass (LPB) to a specific Arbitrated Loop Physical Address  
(ALPA) or to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop. [alpa] can be a specific ALPA or the  
keyword ALL to choose all ALPAs.  
clear  
Clears the counters on the specified port.  
enable  
Sends a Loop Port Enable (LPE) to all ALPAs on the arbitrated loop.  
speed [transmission_speed]  
Specifies the transmission speed for the specified port. Choose one of the  
following port speed values:  
1Gb/s  
One gigabit per second.  
2Gb/s  
Two gigabits per second.  
Auto  
The port speed is automatically detected.  
state [state]  
Specifies one of the following administrative states for the specified port:  
Online  
Places the port online.  
Offline  
Places the port offline.  
Diagnostics  
Prepares the port for testing.  
Down  
Disables the port.  
59048-02 A  
A-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
Q
Set Setup Command  
Changes SNMP and system configuration settings. The switch maintains one  
SNMP configuration and one system configuration.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin  
set setup  
snmp  
system  
Keywords snmp  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change SNMP configuration settings.  
Table A-13 describes the SNMP fields. For each parameter, enter a new value or  
press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Table A-13. SNMP Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
Contact  
Specifies the name of the person to be contacted to respond to  
trap events. The default is undefined.  
Location  
Specifies the name of the switch location. The default is  
undefined.  
Trap [1-5] Address  
Specifies the workstation IP address to which SNMP traps are  
sent. The default address for trap 1 is 10.0.0.254. The default  
address for traps 2–5 is 0.0.0.0. Addresses, other than 0.0.0.0,  
for all traps must be unique.  
Trap [1-5] Port  
Specifies the workstation port to which SNMP traps are sent.  
The default is 162.  
Trap [1-5] Severity  
Trap [1-5] Version  
Trap [1-5] Enabled  
ReadCommunity  
Specifies the severity level to use when monitoring trap events.  
The default is Warning  
Specifies the SNMP version (1 or 2) to use in formatting traps.  
The default is 2.  
Specifies whether traps (event information) are enabled or  
disabled (default).  
Read community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
read information from the switch. This is a write-only field. The  
value on the switch and the SNMP management server must  
be the same. The default is “public”.  
WriteCommunity  
Write community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
write information to the switch. This is a write-only field. The  
value on the switch and the SNMP management server must  
be the same. The default is “private”.  
A-46  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
Q
Table A-13. SNMP Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
TrapCommunity  
Trap community password that authorizes an SNMP agent to  
receive traps. This is a write-only field. The value on the switch  
and the SNMP management server must be the same. The  
default is “public”.  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the generation of traps in  
response to trap authentication failures. The default is False.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) SNMP communication with  
other switches in the fabric. The default is True.  
system  
Prompts you in a line-by-line fashion to change system configuration settings.  
Table A-14 describes the system configuration fields. For each parameter, enter a  
new value or press the Enter key to accept the current value shown in brackets.  
Note:  
Changing the IP address will terminate all Ethernet management  
sessions.  
Table A-14. System Configuration Settings  
Entry  
Description  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Ethernet boot method: 1 - Static, 2 - Bootp, 3 - DHCP,  
4 - RARP. The default is 1 - Static.  
Ethernet Internet Protocol (IP) address. The default is  
10.0.0.1.  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Ethernet subnet mask address.  
Ethernet IP address gateway.  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
FCNetworkDiscovery  
Fibre Channel boot method: 1 - Static, 3 - DHCP. The  
default is 1 - Static.  
FCNetworkAddress  
FCNetworkMask  
Fibre Channel Internet Protocol (IP) address for the  
Ethernet port. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
Fibre Channel subnet mask address. The default is  
255.0.0.0.  
FCGatewayAddress  
Fibre Channel IP address gateway. The default is  
10.0.0.254.  
59048-02 A  
A-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
Q
Table A-14. System Configuration Settings (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
AdminTimeout  
Specifies the amount of time in minutes the switch  
waits before terminating an idle Admin session. Zero  
(0) disables the time out threshold. The default is 30,  
the maximum is 1440.  
SecurityEnabled  
LocalLogEnabled  
RemoteLogEnabled  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the enforcement of  
account names and passwords. The default is False.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the saving of log  
information on the switch. The default is True.  
Enables (True) or disables (False) the recording of  
the switch event log on a remote host that supports  
the syslog protocol. The default is False.  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
The IP address of the host that will receive the switch  
event log information if remote logging is enabled.  
The default is 10.0.0.254.  
Examples The following is an example of the Set Setup SNMP command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> set setup snmp  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Trap Severity Options  
---------------------  
unknown, emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notify, info, debug, mark  
Contact  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[<sysContact undefined]  
[sysLocation undefined]  
Location  
Trap1Address  
Trap1Port  
[10.20.71.15  
[162  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Trap1Severity  
Trap1Version  
Trap1Enabled  
Trap2Address  
Trap2Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap2Severity  
Trap2Version  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2) [2  
A-48  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Set Setup Command  
Q
Trap2Enabled  
Trap3Address  
Trap3Port  
(True / False)  
[False  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap3Severity  
Trap3Version  
Trap3Enabled  
Trap4Address  
Trap4Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap4Severity  
Trap4Version  
Trap4Enabled  
Trap5Address  
Trap5Port  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(decimal value)  
[False  
[0.0.0.0  
[162  
Trap5Severity  
Trap5Version  
Trap5Enabled  
ReadCommunity  
WriteCommunity  
TrapCommunity  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
(see allowed options above) [warning  
(1 / 2)  
[2  
(True / False)  
[False  
[public  
[private  
[public  
[False  
[True  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(string, max=32 chars)  
(True / False)  
(True / False)  
The following is an example of the Set Setup System command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> set setup system  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will follow.  
Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to accept the current value.  
If you wish to terminate this process before reaching the end of the list  
press 'q' or 'Q' and the ENTER key to do so.  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
FCNetworkDiscovery  
FCNetworkAddress  
FCNetworkMask  
(1=Static, 2=Bootp, 3=Dhcp, 4=Rarp) [Static  
]
]
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(1=Static, 3=Dhcp)  
[10.0.0.1  
[255.255.255.0]  
[10.0.0.254  
[Static  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
[0.0.0.0  
[255.0.0.0  
[10.0.0.254  
FCGatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
(dec value 0-1440 minutes, 0=never) [30  
SecurityEnabled  
LocalLogEnabled  
RemoteLogEnabled  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
(True / False)  
[False  
(True / False)  
[True  
(True / False)  
[False  
(dot-notated IP Address)  
[10.0.0.254  
59048-02 A  
A-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
Show Command  
Displays fabric, switch, and port operational information.  
User  
show  
about  
Authority  
Syntax  
alarm  
blade  
broadcast  
chassis  
config [option]  
domains  
donor  
fabric  
interface  
log [option]  
lsdb  
mem [count]  
ns [option]  
pagebreak  
panel  
perf [option]  
port [port_number]  
post log  
setup [option]  
slot [slot_number]  
steering [domain_id]  
support  
switch  
topology  
users  
version  
Keywords about  
Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the  
switch. This keyword is equivalent to the Version keyword.  
alarm  
Displays the last 200 alarm entries.  
blade  
Displays information about the I/O blades and cross-connect modules.  
broadcast  
Displays the broadcast tree information and all ports that are currently transmitting  
and receiving broadcast frames.  
A-50  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
chassis  
Displays chassis component status and temperature.  
config [option]  
Displays switch, port, and zoning configuration attributes. Refer to the ”Show  
Config Command” on page A-64.  
domains  
Displays list of each domain and its worldwide name in the fabric.  
donor  
Displays list of current donor configuration for all ports.  
fabric  
Displays list of each domain, symbolic name, worldwide name, node IP address,  
and port IP address.  
interface  
Displays the status of the active network interfaces.  
log [option]  
Displays log entries. Refer to the ”Show Log Command” on page A-67.  
lsdb  
Displays Link State database information.  
mem [count]  
Displays information about memory activity for the number of seconds given by  
[count]. If you omit [count], the value 1 is used. Displayed memory values are in  
1K block units.  
Note:  
This keyword will display memory activity updates until [count] is  
reached – it cannot be interrupted. Therefore, avoid using large values  
for [count].  
ns [option]  
Displays name server information for the specified [option]. If you omit [option],  
name server information for the local domain ID is displayed. [option] can have the  
following values:  
all  
Displays name server information for all switches and ports.  
[domain_id]  
Displays name server information for the switch given by [domain_id].  
[domain_id] is a switch domain ID.  
[port_id]  
Displays name server information for the port given by [port_id]. [port_id] is a  
port Fibre Channel address.  
59048-02 A  
A-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
pagebreak  
Displays the current pagebreak setting. The pagebreak setting limits the display of  
information to 20 lines (On) or allows the continuous display of information without  
a break (Off).  
panel  
Displays the hardware configuration and port mapping for a switch. The  
representation of the faceplate indicates power supply modules (PS), I/O blades  
(IO), and CPU module (CPU).  
perf [option]  
Displays performance information for all ports. Refer to the ”Show Perf Command”  
on page A-69.  
port [port_number]  
Displays operational information for the port given by [port_number]. Ports are  
numbered beginning with 0. If [port number] is omitted, information is displayed for  
all ports. Table A-15 describes the port parameters.  
Table A-15. Show Port Parameters  
Entry  
Description  
AIinit  
Incremented each time the port begins AL initialization.  
AIinitError  
Number of times the port entered initialization and the  
initialization failed.  
Bad Frames  
Number of frames that have framing errors.  
Number of class x frames received by this port.  
Number of class x frames sent by this port.  
Number of class x words received by this port.  
Number of class x words sent by this port.  
ClassXFramesIn  
ClassXFramesOut  
ClassXWordsIn  
ClassXWordsOut  
ClassXToss  
Number of times an SOFi3 or SOFn3 frame is tossed from  
TBUF.  
DecodeError  
EpConnects  
Number of decode errors detected  
Number of times an E_Port connected through ISL  
negotiation.  
FBusy  
Number of times the switch sent a F_BSY because Class 2  
frame could not be delivered within ED_TOV time. Number of  
class 2 and class 3 fabric busy (F_BSY) frames generated by  
this port in response to incoming frames. This usually  
indicates a busy condition on the fabric or N_Port that is  
preventing delivery of this frame.  
A-52  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
Table A-15. Show Port Parameters (Continued)  
Entry  
Flowerrors  
Description  
Received a frame when there were no available credits.  
Number of frames from devices that were rejected.  
Invalid CRC detected.  
FReject  
InvalidCRC  
InvalidDestAddr  
LIP ALPD ALPS  
Invalid destination address detected.  
Number of F7, AL_PS LIPs, or AL_PD (vendor specific)  
resets, performed.  
LIPF7ALPS  
This LIP is used to reinitialize the loop. An L_Port, identified  
by AL_PS, may have noticed a performance degradation and  
is trying to restore the loop.  
LIPF8ALPS  
LIPF7F7  
This LIP denotes a loop failure detected by the L_Port  
identified by AL_PS.  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to acquire a valid  
AL_PA.  
LIPF8F7  
A loop initialization primitive frame used to indicate that a loop  
failure has been detected at the receiver.  
Link Failures  
Number of optical link failures detected by this port. A link  
failure is a loss of synchronization or by loss of signal while  
not in the offline state. A loss of signal causes the switch to  
attempt to re-establish the link. If the link is not re-established,  
a link failure is counted. A link reset is performed after a link  
failure.  
Login  
Number of device logins  
Logout  
Number of device logouts  
LoopTimeouts  
LossOfSync  
A two (2) second timeout as specified by FC-AL-2.  
Number of synchronization losses (>100 ms) detected by this  
port. A loss of synchronization is detected by receipt of an  
invalid transmission word.  
PrimSeqErrors  
RxLinkResets  
Primitive sequence errors detected.  
Number of link reset primitives received from an attached  
device.  
RxOfflineSeq  
TotalErrors  
Number of offline sequences received. An OLS is issued for  
link initialization, a Receive & Recognize Not_Operational  
(NOS) state, or to enter the offline state.  
Total number of errors detected.  
59048-02 A  
A-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
Table A-15. Show Port Parameters (Continued)  
Entry  
Description  
TotalLIPsRecvd  
TotalLIPsXmitd  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames received by this  
port.  
Number of loop initialization primitive frames transmitted by  
this port.  
TotalLinkResets  
TotalOfflineSeq  
TotalRxFrames  
TotalRxWords  
TotalTxFrames  
TotalTxWords  
TxLinkResets  
TxOfflineSeq  
TxWaits  
Total number of link reset primitives.  
Total number of Offline Sequences issued by this port.  
Total number of frames received by this port.  
Total number of words received by this port.  
Total number of frames issued by this port.  
Total number of words issued by this port.  
Number of Link Resets issued by this port.  
Total number of Offline Sequences issued by this port.  
Time waiting to transmit when blocked with no credit.  
Measured in FC Word times.  
post log  
Displays the Power On Self Test (POST) log which contains results from the  
POST.  
setup [option]  
Displays setup attributes for the system, SNMP, and the switch manufacturer.  
Refer to the ”Show Setup Command” on page A-71.  
slot [slot_number]  
Displays the hardware attributes for the slot given by [slot_number]. [slot_number]  
can be 0–12. If you omit [slot_number], the hardware configuration for all slots is  
displayed.  
steering [domain_id]  
Displays the routes that data takes to the switch given by [domain_id]. If you omit  
[domain_id], the system displays routes for all switches in the fabric.  
support  
Executes a series of commands that display a complete description of the switch,  
its configuration, and operation. The display can be captured from the screen and  
used for diagnosing problems. This keyword is intended for use at the request of  
your authorized maintenance provider. The commands that are executed include  
the following:  
A-54  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
„
„
„
„
„
„
Alias List  
Config List  
Date  
History  
Ps  
Show (About, Alarm, Backtrace, Chassis, Config Port, Config Switch, Config  
Threshold, Dev, Dev Settings, Domains, Donor, Fabric, Log, Log Settings,  
Lsdb, Mem, Ns, Perf, Port, Setup Mfg, Setup Snmp, Setup System,  
Steering, Switch, Topology, Users)  
„
„
„
„
„
Uptime  
User Accounts  
Whoami  
Zoneset (Active, List)  
Zoning (History, Limits, List)  
switch  
Displays switch operational information.  
topology  
Displays all connected devices.  
users  
Displays a list of logged-in users. This is equivalent to the User List command.  
version  
Displays an introductory set of information about operational attributes of the  
switch. This keyword is equivalent to the About keyword.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Blade command:  
SANbox2-64 N108 #> show blade  
Blade Slot  
Type Number Range State  
----- ------ ----- -----  
Port Admin  
Oper  
Diag  
Temp  
Credit  
State  
-----  
Online  
Online  
Status  
------  
Status  
------  
Pool  
------  
IO-0  
IO-1  
IO-2  
IO-3  
IO-4  
IO-5  
IO-6  
IO-7  
CC-0  
CC-1  
1
0-7 Online  
8-15 Online  
16-23 Online  
24-31 Online  
32-39 Online  
40-47 Online  
48-55 Online  
56-63 Online  
Compromised Normal  
Passed Normal  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
2
3
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
4
6
Online  
Online  
Compromised Normal  
Passed Normal  
7
8
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
9
11  
12  
*
*
Online  
Online  
Online  
Online  
Passed  
Passed  
Normal  
Normal  
59048-02 A  
A-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Chassis command:  
SANbox2 #> show chassis  
Chassis Information  
-------------------  
FanStatus (1)  
Good  
FanStatus (2)  
Good  
FanStatus (3)  
Good  
PowerSupplyStatus (1)  
PowerSupplyStatus (2)  
HeartBeatCode  
NotInstalled  
NotInstalled  
1
HeartBeatStatus  
Normal  
User Ports Map  
--------------  
(displays Non Real-Time data for slot # and blade type-instance)  
SL#0 SL#1 SL#2 SL#3 SL#4 SL#5 SL#6 SL#7 SL#8 SL#9 SL#10  
PS-0 IO-0 IO-1 IO-2 IO-3 CPU-0 IO-4 IO-5 IO-6 IO-7 PS-1  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
The following is an example of the Show Domains command:  
SANbox2 #> show domains  
Principal switch is (remote): 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c  
Upstream Principal ISL is  
Domain ID List:  
: 1  
Domain 97 (0x61) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed  
Domain 98 (0x62) WWN = 10:00:00:60:df:22:2e:0c  
Domain 99 (0x63) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:72:45  
Domain 100 (0x64) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:ba:68  
Domain 101 (0x65) WWN = 10:00:00:60:df:22:2e:06  
Domain 102 (0x66) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:ef  
Domain 103 (0x67) WWN = 10:00:00:60:69:50:0b:6c  
Domain 104 (0x68) WWN = 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:b8:b7  
A-56  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Fabric command:  
SANbox2 #> show fabric  
Domain  
------  
WWN  
---  
Enet IP Addr  
------------  
FC IP Addr  
----------  
0.0.0.0  
SymbolicName  
------------  
gui sb1 .11  
sw12  
16 (0x10) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:77:81 10.20.68.11  
17 (0x11) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:6a:2d 10.20.68.12  
18 (0x12) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:c3:04 10.20.68.160  
19 (0x13) 10:00:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56 10.20.68.108  
0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
sw .160  
0.0.0.0  
Sb2 .108  
The following is an example of the Show Panel command:  
SANbox2 #> show panel  
User Ports Map  
--------------  
(displays Non Real-Time data for slot # and blade type-instance)  
SL#0 SL#1 SL#2 SL#3 SL#4 SL#5 SL#6 SL#7 SL#8 SL#9 SL#10  
PS-0 IO-0 IO-1 IO-2 IO-3 CPU-0 IO-4 IO-5 IO-6 IO-7 PS-1  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
The following is an example of the Show NS (local domain) command:  
SANbox2 #> show ns  
Seq Domain  
No ID  
Port  
ID  
Port  
Type COS PortWWN  
NodeWWN  
-------  
--- ------  
------ ---- --- -------  
1
2
3
4
19 (0x13) 1301e1 NL  
3
3
3
3
21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69 20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
21:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b 20:00:00:20:37:73:12:9b  
21:00:00:20:37:73:05:26 20:00:00:20:37:73:05:26  
21:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc 20:01:00:e0:8b:27:a7:bc  
19 (0x13) 1301e2 NL  
19 (0x13) 1301e4 NL  
19 (0x13) 130d00 N  
59048-02 A  
A-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show NS [domain_ID] command:  
SANbox2 #> show ns 18  
Seq Domain Port  
No ID  
--- ------  
18 (0x12) 120700 N  
Port  
ID  
Type COS PortWWN  
NodeWWN  
-------  
------ ---- --- -------  
1
3
21:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc 20:00:00:e0:8b:07:a7:bc  
The following is an example of the Show NS [port_ID] command:  
SANbox2 #> show ns 1301e1  
Port ID: 1301e1  
--------  
PortType  
NL  
PortWWN  
21:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
SymbolicPortName  
NodeWWN  
20:00:00:20:37:73:13:69  
SymbolicNodeName  
NodeIPAddress  
ClassOfService  
PortIPAddress  
FabricPortName  
FC4Type  
0.0.0.0  
3
0.0.0.0  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:bc:56  
FCP  
FC4Desc  
(NULL)  
The following is an example of the Show Interface command:  
SANbox2 #> show interface  
eth0  
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:DD:00:BD:ED  
inet addr:10.20.68.107 Bcast:10.20.68.255 Mask:255.255.255.0  
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1  
RX packets:4712 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:3000 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100  
RX bytes:415313 (405.5 Kb) TX bytes:716751 (699.9 Kb)  
Interrupt:11 Base address:0xfcc0  
lo  
Link encap:Local Loopback  
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0  
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1  
RX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0  
TX packets:304 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0  
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0  
RX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb) TX bytes:20116 (19.6 Kb)  
A-58  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Port command:  
SANbox2 #> show port 1  
Port Number: 1  
------------  
AdminState  
AsicNumber  
AsicPort  
Online  
PortID  
150100  
0
PortWWN  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:bc:b8  
1
RunningType  
SFPPartNumber  
SFPRevision  
SFPType  
Unknown  
Unknown  
0
ConfigType  
DiagStatus  
EpConnState  
EpIsoReason  
LinkSpeed  
LinkState  
LoginStatus  
MaxCredit  
G
Passed  
None  
NotInstalled  
Unknown  
00000000  
Port1  
NotApplicable  
2Gb/s  
SFPVendor  
SFPVendorID  
SymbolicName  
SyncStatus  
XmitterEnabled  
Inactive  
NotLoggedIn  
12  
SyncLost  
True  
OperationalState Offline  
ALInit  
0
0
0
LIP_F8_AL_PS  
LIP_F8_F7  
0
ALInitError  
BadFrames  
0
LinkFailures  
Login  
26  
25  
24  
0
Class2FramesIn 0  
Class2FramesOut 0  
Logout  
Class2WordsIn  
0
LoopTimeouts  
LossOfSync  
PrimSeqErrors  
RxLinkResets  
RxOfflineSeq  
TotalErrors  
Class2WordsOut 0  
Class3FramesIn 0  
Class3FramesOut 0  
1
0
23  
45  
26  
Class3Toss  
0
0
Class3WordsIn  
Class3WordsOut 0  
TotalLIPsRecvd 0  
TotalLIPsXmitd 0  
TotalLinkResets 77  
TotalOfflineSeq 59  
DecodeErrors  
EpConnects  
FBusy  
0
25  
0
FlowErrors  
FReject  
0
TotalRxFrames  
TotalRxWords  
TotalTxFrames  
TotalTxWords  
TxLinkResets  
TxOfflineSeq  
TxWaits  
0
0
0
InvalidCRC  
0
0
InvalidDestAddr 0  
LIP_AL_PD_AL_PS 0  
0
54  
LIP_F7_AL_PS  
LIP_F7_F7  
0
0
14  
222649090  
59048-02 A  
A-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Slot command:  
SANbox2 #> show slot  
Slot  
Blade Port Blade  
Diag  
Temp  
Credit  
Number Type  
Range Status  
Status  
------  
Status  
------  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Pool  
------ ----- ----- ------  
------  
0
PS-0  
IO-0  
IO-1  
IO-2  
IO-3  
CPU-0  
IO-4  
IO-5  
IO-6  
IO-7  
PS-1  
CC-0  
CC-1  
*
NotInstalled Passed  
*
0
0
0
0
*
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
1
0-7 Good  
8-15 Good  
Compromised  
Passed  
2
3
-
-
*
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
4
5
Good  
Passed  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
6
32-39 Good  
40-47 Good  
Compromised  
Passed  
7
8
-
-
*
*
*
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
NotInstalled NotInstalled Normal  
9
10  
11  
12  
NotInstalled Passed  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Good  
Good  
Passed  
Passed  
A-60  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Switch command:  
SANbox2 #> show switch  
Switch Information  
------------------  
SymbolicName  
sw .108  
SwitchWWN  
100000c0dd00bc56  
SwitchType  
SANbox2-64  
PROMVersion  
V2.0.0.0-0 (day month date time year)  
CreditPool  
0
DomainID  
19 (0x13)  
FirstPortAddress  
FlashSize - MBytes  
LogLevel  
130000  
128  
Critical  
MaxPorts  
16  
NumberOfResets  
224  
ReasonForLastReset  
SWImageVersion (1) - build date  
SWImageVersion (2) - build date  
ActiveImageVersion - build date  
PowerUp  
V2.0.0.0-17 (day month date time year)  
V2.0.0.0-17 (day month date time year)  
V2.0.0.0-2 (day month date time year)  
PendingImageVersion - build date V2.0.0.0-17 (day month date time year)  
ActiveConfiguration  
AdminState  
default  
Online  
False  
AdminModeActive  
BeaconOnStatus  
False  
OperationalState  
PrincipalSwitchRole  
SwitchDiagnosticsStatus  
Online  
False  
Passed  
The following is an example of the Show Topology command:  
SANbox2 #> show topology  
Unique ID Key  
-------------  
A = ALPA, D = Domain ID, P = Port ID  
Port  
Local Local  
Remote Remote  
Type NodeWWN  
------ -------  
Unique  
ID  
Number Type PortWWN  
------ ----- -------  
------  
010500 P  
4(0x4) D  
5
F
E
20:05:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec  
20:0a:00:c0:dd:00:bd:ec  
N
E
20:00:00:00:c9:22:1e:93  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:80:21  
10  
59048-02 A  
A-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Topology command for port 1:  
SANbox2 #> show topology 1  
Local Link Information  
----------------------  
PortNumber 1  
PortID  
650100  
PortWWN  
PortType  
20:01:00:c0:dd:00:91:11  
F
Remote Link Information  
-----------------------  
Device 0  
NodeWWN 50:80:02:00:00:06:d5:38  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 1  
NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:08:c9  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 2  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
Device 3  
NodeWWN 20:00:00:20:37:2b:05:c9  
PortType NL  
Description (NULL)  
IPAddress 0.0.0.0  
A-62  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Version command:  
SANbox2 #> show version  
*****************************************************  
*
*
*
*
*
*
Command Line Interface SHell (CLISH)  
*****************************************************  
SystemDescription QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
Eth0NetworkAddress 10.20.11.192 (use 'set setup system' to update)  
FCNetworkAddress  
MACAddress  
0.0.0.0 (use 'set setup system' to update)  
00:c0:dd:00:71:ee  
WorldWideName  
SymbolicName  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:71:ed  
SB211.192  
ActiveSWVersion  
ActiveTimestamp  
V2.0.0.0-26  
day month date time year  
DiagnosticsStatus Passed  
SecurityEnabled True  
59048-02 A  
A-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
Q
Show Config Command  
Displays switch, I/O blade, port, alarm threshold, and zoning attributes for the  
current configuration.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
show config  
blade [slot_number]  
port [port_number]  
switch  
threshold  
zoning  
Keywords blade [slot_number]  
Displays configuration parameters for the I/O blade or cross-connect blade that  
occupies the slot given by [slot_number]. If you omit [slot_number], the  
configuration parameters for all I/O and cross-connect blades are displayed.  
port [port_number]  
Displays configuration parameters for the port number given by [port_number].  
Ports are numbered beginning with 0. If [port_number] is omitted, all ports are  
specified.  
switch  
Displays configuration parameters for the switch.  
threshold  
Displays alarm threshold parameters for the switch.  
zoning  
Displays zoning configuration parameters for the switch.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Config Port command:  
SANbox2 #> show config port 3  
Port Number: 3  
------------  
AdminState  
LinkSpeed  
Offline  
Auto  
GL  
PortType  
ISLSecurity  
SymbolicName  
ALFairness  
Any  
Port3  
False  
DeviceScanEnabled True  
ForceOfflineRSCN  
ARB_FF  
False  
False  
0
InteropCredit  
ExtCredit  
0
FANEnabled  
LCFEnabled  
True  
False  
A-64  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
Q
MFSEnabled  
MSEnabled  
NoClose  
True  
True  
False  
Disabled  
False  
False  
IOStreamGuard  
VIEnabled  
CheckAlps  
The following is an example of the Show Config Switch command:  
SANbox2 #> show config switch  
Switch Configuration Information  
--------------------------------  
AdminState  
Online  
BroadcastEnabled  
InbandEnabled  
DomainID  
False  
True  
19 (0x13)  
DomainIDLock  
SymbolicName  
R_A_TOV  
True  
sw108  
10000  
E_D_TOV  
2000  
PrincipalPriority  
ConfigDescription  
ConfigLastSavedBy  
ConfigLastSavedOn  
FC-SW-2 Compliant  
254  
QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
admin@OB-session5  
day month date time year  
True  
Legacy Address Format False1  
The following is an example of the Show Config Threshold command:  
SANbox2 #> show config threshold  
Configuration Name: default  
------------  
Threshold Configuration Information  
-----------------------------------  
ThresholdMonitoringEnabled  
CRCErrorsMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
False  
True  
25  
FallingTrigger  
1
SampleWindow  
10  
DecodeErrorsMonitoringEnabled True  
RisingTrigger 25  
1
Appears only if FC-SW-2 Compliant is False.  
59048-02 A  
A-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Config Command  
Q
FallingTrigger  
0
SampleWindow  
10  
True  
2
ISLMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
0
10  
True  
5
LoginMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
True  
5
LogoutMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
1
10  
True  
100  
5
LOSMonitoringEnabled  
RisingTrigger  
FallingTrigger  
SampleWindow  
10  
The following is an example of the Show Config Zoning command:  
SANbox2 #> show config zoning  
Configuration Name: default  
-------------------  
Zoning Configuration Information  
--------------------------------  
FC-SW-2 AutoSave  
Default  
True  
All  
A-66  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
Q
Show Log Command  
Displays the contents of the log or the parameters used to create entries in the  
log. The log contains a maximum of 200 entries. When the log reaches its entry  
capacity, subsequent entries overwrite the existing entries, beginning with the  
oldest.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
show log  
component  
level  
options  
port  
settings  
Keywords component  
Displays the components currently being monitored for events.  
level  
Displays the event severity level needed to create an entry in the log. If the  
severity level occurs on a port or on a component which is not defined, no entry is  
made in the log.  
options  
Displays the options used to set the component and log level attributes.  
port  
Displays the ports being monitored for events. If an event occurs which is of the  
defined level and on a defined component, but not on a defined port, no entry is  
made in the log.  
settings  
Displays the current settings for component, level and port. This command is  
equivalent to executing the following commands separately: Show Log  
Component, Show Log Level, and Show Log Port.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Log Component command:  
SANbox2 #> show log component  
Current setting(s) for log component: NameServer  
The following is an example of the Show Log Level command:  
SANbox2 #> show log level  
Current settings for log  
------------------------  
level  
Critical  
59048-02 A  
A-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Log Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Log Options command:  
SANbox2 #> show log options  
Allowed options for log  
-----------------------  
component All, None, NameServer, MgmtServer, Zoning, Switch, Chassis, Blade,  
Port, Eport, Snmp, Other,CimServer  
level  
Critical,Warn,Info,None  
The following is an example of the Show Log command:  
[327][day month date time year][I][Eport Port:0/8][Eport State=  
E_A0_GET_DOMAIN_ID]  
[328][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][FSPF PortUp state=0]  
[329][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending init hello]  
[330][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Processing EFP, oxid= 0x8]  
[331][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Eport State = E_A2_IDLE]  
[332][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][EFP,WWN= 0x100000c0dd00b845,  
len= 0x30]  
[333][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Sending LSU oxid=0xc:type=1]  
[334][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Send Zone Merge Request]  
[335][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][LSDB Xchg timer set]  
[336][day month date time year][I][Eport Port: 0/8][Setting attribute  
Oper.UserPort.0.8.EpConnState Connected]  
A-68  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Perf Command  
Q
Show Perf Command  
Displays port performance in frames/second and bytes/second. If you omit the  
keyword, the command displays data transmitted (out), data received (in), and  
total data transmitted and received in frames/second and bytes per second.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
show perf  
byte  
inbyte  
outbyte [port_number]  
frame  
inframe  
outframe  
errors  
Keywords byte  
Displays continuous performance data in total bytes/second transmitted and  
received for all ports. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
inbyte  
Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second received for all ports. Type  
“q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
outbyte [port_number]  
Displays continuous performance data in bytes/second transmitted for the set of  
16 ports (0–15, 16–31, ...) that include [port_number]. Type “q” and press the  
Enter key to stop the display.  
frame [port_number]  
Displays continuous performance data in total frames/second transmitted and  
received for the set of 16 ports that include [port_number]. Type “q” and press the  
Enter key to stop the display.  
inframe [port_number]  
Displays continuous performance data in frames/second received for the set of 16  
ports that include [port_number]. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the  
display.  
outframe [port_number]  
Displays continuous performance data in frames/second transmitted for the set of  
16 ports that include [port_number]. Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the  
display.  
errors [port_number]  
Displays continuous error counts for the set of 16 ports that include [port_number].  
Type “q” and press the Enter key to stop the display.  
59048-02 A  
A-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Perf Command  
Q
Examples The following is an example of the Show Perf command:  
SANbox2 #> show perf 63  
Port  
Bytes/s  
(in)  
Bytes/s  
Bytes/s  
Frames/s  
Frames/s  
Frames/s  
Number  
(out)  
(total)  
(in)  
(out)  
(total)  
------ -------  
-------  
-------  
--------  
--------  
--------  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
47M  
0
23K  
0
47M  
0
23K  
0
726  
0
24K  
0
23K  
0
47M  
0
47M  
0
726  
0
23K  
0
24K  
0
The following is an example of the Show Perf Byte command:  
SANbox2 #> show perf byte 63  
Displaying bytes/sec (total)... (Press 'q' and the ENTER key to stop display)  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
31M 0  
46M 0  
47M 0  
47M 0  
46M 0  
47M 0  
47M 0  
46M 0  
47M 0  
47M 0  
46M 0  
47M 0  
47M 0  
46M 0  
47M 0  
47M 0  
46M 0  
47M 0  
47M 0  
q
A-70  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
Q
Show Setup Command  
Displays the current SNMP and system settings.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
show setup  
mfg  
snmp  
system  
Keywords mfg  
Displays manufacturing information about the switch.  
snmp  
Displays the current SNMP settings.  
system  
Displays the current system settings.  
Examples The following is an example of the Show Setup Mfg command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup mfg  
Manufacturing Information  
-------------------------  
BrandName  
QLogic  
BuildDate  
Unknown  
Unknown  
022412352  
022312348  
1419000  
1419001  
1419002  
1419003  
1419004  
1419005  
1419006  
1419007  
ChassisPartNumber  
ChassisSerialNumber  
CPUBoardSerialNumber  
Slot1BoardSerialNumber  
Slot2BoardSerialNumber  
Slot3BoardSerialNumber  
Slot4BoardSerialNumber  
Slot6BoardSerialNumber  
Slot7BoardSerialNumber  
Slot8BoardSerialNumber  
Slot9BoardSerialNumber  
Slot11BoardSerialNumber 1419008  
Slot12BoardSerialNumber 1419009  
MACAddress  
00:c0:dd:00:90:e8  
PlanarPartNumber  
SwitchSymbolicName  
SwitchWWN  
Unknown  
QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
10:00:00:c0:dd:00:90:e9  
QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.12  
SystemDescription  
SystemObjectID  
59048-02 A  
A-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Setup Snmp command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup snmp  
SNMP Information  
----------------  
Contact  
<sysContact undefined>  
Location  
N_107 System Test Lab  
Description  
Trap1Address  
Trap1Port  
QLogic SANbox2 FC Switch  
10.0.0.254  
162  
Trap1Severity  
Trap1Version  
Trap1Enabled  
Trap2Address  
Trap2Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap2Severity  
Trap2Version  
Trap2Enabled  
Trap3Address  
Trap3Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap3Severity  
Trap3Version  
Trap3Enabled  
Trap4Address  
Trap4Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap4Severity  
Trap4Version  
Trap4Enabled  
Trap5Address  
Trap5Port  
warning  
2
False  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Trap5Severity  
Trap5Version  
Trap5Enabled  
ObjectID  
warning  
2
False  
1.3.6.1.4.1.1663.1.1.1.1.12  
AuthFailureTrap  
ProxyEnabled  
True  
True  
A-72  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Show Setup Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Show Setup System command:  
SANbox2 #> show setup system  
System Information  
------------------  
Eth0NetworkDiscovery  
Eth0NetworkAddress  
Eth0NetworkMask  
Eth0GatewayAddress  
FCNetworkDiscovery  
FCNetworkAddress  
FCNetworkMask  
Static  
10.20.11.32  
255.255.252.0  
10.20.8.254  
Static  
0.0.0.0  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.254  
30  
FCGatewayAddress  
AdminTimeout  
SecurityEnabled  
LocalLogEnabled  
RemoteLogEnabled  
RemoteLogHostAddress  
False  
True  
False  
10.0.0.254  
59048-02 A  
A-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Shutdown Command  
Q
Shutdown Command  
Terminates all data transfers on the switch at convenient points and closes the  
Telnet session. Always power cycle the switch after entering this command.  
Authority  
Admin  
Syntax  
Notes  
shutdown  
Always use this command to perform an orderly shut down before removing  
power from the switch.  
When the shutdown is complete, the Heartbeat LED is extinguished.  
A-74  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
Q
Test Command  
Tests I/O blades and ports using internal (SerDes level), external (SFP), and  
online loopback tests. Internal and external tests require that the port be placed in  
diagnostic mode. Refer to the ”Set Command” on page A-30 for information about  
changing the I/O blade or port administrative state. While the test is running, the  
remaining ports on the switch remain fully operational.  
Authority  
Admin  
Syntax  
test  
blade [slot_number]  
port [port_number] [test_type]  
cancel  
status  
Keywords blade [slot_number]  
Tests the ASIC registers and performs an internal SerDes test on all ports on the I/  
O blade that occupies the slot given by [slot_number]. I/O blade slot numbers are  
1–4 and 6–9. The I/O blade must be in diagnostics mode to perform this test.  
port [port_number] [test_type]  
Tests the port given by [port_number] using the test given by [test_type]. If you  
omit [test_type], Internal is used. [test_type] can have the following values:  
internal  
Tests the SerDes. This is the default. The port must be in diagnostics mode  
to perform this test.  
external  
Tests both the SerDes and SFP. The port must be in diagnostics mode to  
perform this test, and a loopback plug must be installed in the SFP.  
online  
Tests one online port.  
cancel  
Cancels the online test in progress.  
status  
Displays the status of a test in progress, or if there is no test in progress, the  
status of the test that was executed last.  
Examples To run an internal (SerDes) or external (SFP) port test, do the following:  
1.  
To start an admin session, enter the following command and press the Enter  
key.  
admin start  
2.  
Place the port in Diagnostics mode, enter the following command (x = port  
number) and press the Enter key.  
set port x state diagnostics  
59048-02 A  
A-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
Q
3.  
4.  
Insert the loopback plug into the SFP on the selected port.  
Choose the type of port loopback test to run:  
„
To run an internal loopback test, enter the following:  
test port x internal  
„
To run an external loopback test, enter the following command. A  
loopback plug must be installed for this test to pass.  
test port x external  
5.  
A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press the Enter key  
to accept each default parameter value, or type a new value for each  
parameter and press the Enter key. The TestLength parameter is the  
number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases)  
parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern  
parameter is the pattern in the payload.  
6.  
7.  
After the test type has been chosen and the command executed, a message  
on the screen will appear detailing the test results.  
After the test is run, put the port back into online state by entering the  
following command (x = port number) and pressing the Enter key.  
set port x state online  
8.  
To verify port is back online, enter the following command and press the  
Enter key. The contents of the AdminState field should display be “Online”.  
show port x  
The online loopback (node-to-node) test can test only one port at a time, and that  
port must be online and connected to a remote device. To run the online loopback  
test, do the following:  
1.  
To start an admin session, enter the following command and press the Enter  
key.  
admin start  
2.  
To run the online loopback test, enter the following command and press the  
Enter key.  
test port x online  
A-76  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Test Command  
Q
3.  
A series of test parameters are displayed on the screen. Press the Enter key  
to accept each default parameter value, or type a new value for each  
parameter and press the Enter key. The TestLength parameter is the  
number of frames sent, the FrameSize (256 byte maximum in some cases)  
parameter is the number of bytes in each frame, and the DataPattern  
parameter is the pattern in the payload. Before running the test, make sure  
that the device attached to the port can handle the test parameters.  
SANbox2 (admin) #> test port x online  
A list of attributes with formatting and current values will  
follow. Enter a new value or simply press the ENTER key to  
accept the default value. If you wish to terminate this  
process before reaching the end of the list press 'q' or 'Q'  
and the ENTER key to do so.  
TestLength  
FrameSize  
(decimal value, 1-4294967295) [100  
(decimal value, 36-2148) [256  
]
]
DataPattern (32-bit hex value or 'Default') [Default]  
StopOnError (True/False)  
[False ]  
Do you want to start the test? (y/n) [n]  
4.  
After all parameter values are defined, press the Y key to start the test.  
59048-02 A  
A-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Uptime Command  
Q
Uptime Command  
Displays the elapsed up time since the switch was last reset and reset method. A  
hot reset or non-disruptive firmware activation does not reset the elapsed up time  
reported by this command.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
uptime  
Examples The following is an example of the Uptime command:  
SANbox2 #> uptime  
Elapsed up time : 0 day(s), 2 hour(s), 28 min(s), 44 sec(s)  
Reason last reset: NormalReset  
A-78  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
Q
User Command  
Administers or displays user accounts.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin. The List keyword is available with User authority.  
user  
accounts  
add  
delete [account_name]  
list  
Keywords accounts  
Displays all user accounts that exist on the switch.  
add  
Add a user account to the switch. You will be prompted for an account name, a  
password, authority, and an expiration date.  
„
„
A switch can have a maximum of 15 user accounts.  
Account names are limited to 15 characters; passwords must be 4–20  
characters.  
„
„
Admin authority grants permission to use the Admin command to open an  
admin session, from which all commands can be entered. Without Admin  
authority, you are limited to view-only commands.  
The expiration date is expressed in the number of days until the account  
expires (2000 maximum). The switch will issue an expiration alarm every  
day for seven days prior to expiration.  
delete [account_name]  
Deletes the account name given by [account_name] from the switch.  
list  
Displays the list of users currently logged in and their session numbers. Provides  
the same function as the Show Users command. This keyword is valid for User  
authority and does not require an admin session.  
Examples The following is an example of the User Accounts command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user accounts  
Current list of user accounts  
-----------------------------  
images  
admin  
chuckca  
gregj  
fred  
(admin authority = False, never expires)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
(admin authority = False, never expires)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
(admin authority = True , never expires)  
59048-02 A  
A-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A – Command Line Interface  
User Command  
Q
The following is an example of the User Add command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user add  
Press 'q' and the ENTER key to abort this command.  
account name (1-15 chars)  
: user1  
account password (4-20 chars) :  
please confirm account password:  
set account expiration in days (0-2000, 0=never): [0] 100  
should this account have admin authority? (y/n): [n] y  
OK to add user account 'user1' with admin authority  
and to expire in 100 days?  
Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
The following is an example of the User Delete command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user del user3  
The user account will be deleted. Please confirm (y/n): [n] y  
The following is an example of the User List command:  
SANbox2 (admin) #> user list  
User  
Ethernet Addr-Port  
------------------  
10.20.68.108-1031  
10.20.68.108-1034  
Unknown  
Logged in Since  
----  
---------------  
admin@OB-session1  
admin@OB-session2  
snmp@OB-session3  
snmp@IB-session4  
admin@OB-session5  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
day month date time year  
Unknown  
Unknown  
A-80  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Whoami Command  
Q
Whoami Command  
Displays the account name, session number, and switch domain ID for the Telnet  
session.  
Authority  
Syntax  
User  
whoami  
Examples The following is an example of the Whoami command:  
SANbox2 #> whoami  
User name  
: admin@session2  
: SANbox2  
Switch name  
Switch domain ID: 21 (0x15)  
59048-02 A  
A-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
Q
Zone Command  
Manages zones and zone membership on a switch. The Zone command defines  
members (ports/devices) for a single switch. Zones are members of zone sets.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin authority and a Zoning Edit session. Refer to the ”Zoning Command” on  
page A-89 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session. The List,  
Members, and Zonesets keywords are available with User authority and do not  
require a Zoning Edit session.  
zone  
add [zone] [members]  
copy [zone_source] [zone_destination]  
create [zone]  
delete [zone]  
list  
members [zone]  
remove [zone] [members]  
rename [zone_old [zone_new]  
type [zone] [zone_type]  
zonesets [zone]  
Keywords add [zone] [members]  
Specifies one or more ports/devices given by [members] to add to the zone  
named [zone]. A zone can have a maximum of 256 members. [members] can  
have one of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs and  
port numbers are in decimal. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
„
Alias name  
The application verifies that the [members] format is correct, but does not validate  
that such a port exists.  
copy [zone_source] [zone_destination]  
Creates a new zone named [zone_destination] and copies the membership into it  
from the zone given by [zone_source].  
create [zone]  
Creates a zone with the name given by [zone]. An zone name must begin with a  
letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, _, $,  
^, and -. The zoning database supports a maximum of 1000 zones.  
delete [zone]  
Deletes the specified zone given by [zone] from the zoning database. If the zone  
is a member of the active zone set, the zone will not be removed from the active  
zone set until the active zone set is deactivated.  
A-82  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
Q
list  
Displays a list of all zones and the zone sets of which they are members. This  
keyword is valid for User authority and does not require a zoning edit session.  
members [zone]  
Displays all members of the zone given by [zone]. This keyword is available with  
User authority and does not require a Zoning Edit session.  
remove [zone] [members]  
Removes the ports/devices given by [members] from the zone given by [zone].  
[members] can have one of the following formats:  
„
Domain ID and port number pair (Domain ID, Port Number). Domain IDs and  
port numbers are in decimal. Ports are numbered beginning with 0.  
„
„
6-character hexadecimal device Fibre Channel address (hex)  
16-character hexadecimal worldwide port name (WWPN) with the format  
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  
„
Alias name  
rename [zone_old] [zone_new]  
Renames the zone given by [zone_old] to the zone given by [zone_new].  
type [zone] [zone_type]  
Specifies the zone type given by [zone_type] to be assigned to the zone name  
given by [zone]. If you omit the [zone_type], the system displays the zone type for  
the zone given by [zone]. [zone_type] can be one of the following:  
soft  
Name server zone  
hardACL  
Access control list hard zone. This keyword is case sensitive.  
hardVPF  
Virtual private fabric hard zone. This keyword is case sensitive.  
zonesets [zone]  
Displays all zone sets of which the zone given by [zone] is a member. This  
keyword is available with User authority and does not require a Zoning Edit  
session.  
59048-02 A  
A-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
Q
Examples The following is an example of the Zone List command:  
SANbox2 #> zone list  
Zone  
ZoneSet  
-------------------  
wwn_b0241f  
zone_set_1  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
wwn_0160ed  
wwn_c001b0  
wwn_401248  
wwn_02402f  
wwn_22412f  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
zone_set_1  
The following is an example of the Zone Members command:  
SANbox2 #> zone members wwn_b0241f  
Current List of Members for Zone: wwn_b0241f  
---------------------------------  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
A-84  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zone Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Zone Zonesets command:  
SANbox2 #> zone zonesets zone1  
Current List of ZoneSets for Zone: wwn_b0241f  
----------------------------------  
zone_set_1  
59048-02 A  
A-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
Q
Zoneset Command  
Manages zone sets and zone set membership across the fabric.  
Authority  
Admin authority and a Zoning Edit session. Refer to the ”Zoning Command” on  
page A-89 for information about starting a Zoning Edit session. The Active, List,  
and Zones keywords are available with User authority. You must close the Zoning  
Edit session before using the Activate and Deactivate keywords.  
Syntax  
zoneset  
activate [zone_set]  
active  
add [zone_set] [zone_list]  
copy [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]  
create [zone_set]  
deactivate  
delete [zone_set]  
list  
remove [zone_set] [zone_list]  
rename [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]  
zones [zone_set]  
Keywords activate [zone_set]  
Activates the zone set given by [zone_set]. This keyword deactivates the active  
zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this keyword.  
active  
Displays the name of the active zone set. This keyword is available with User  
authority and does not require a Zoning Edit session.  
add [zone_set] [zone_list]  
Adds a list of zones and aliases given by [zone_list] to the zone set given by  
[zone_set]. Zone and alias names are delimited by spaces in [zone_list]. This  
keyword requires a Zoning Edit session.  
copy [zone_set_source] [zone_set_destination]  
Creates a new zone set named [zone_set_destination] and copies into it the  
membership from the zone set given by [zone_set_source]. This keyword requires  
a Zoning Edit session.  
create [zone_set]  
Creates the zone set with the name given by [zone_set]. A zone set name must  
begin with a letter and be no longer than 64 characters. Valid characters are 0-9,  
A-Z, a-z, _, $, ^, and -. This keyword requires a Zoning Edit session. The zoning  
database supports a maximum of 256 zone sets.  
deactivate  
Deactivates the active zone set. Close the Zoning Edit session before using this  
keyword.  
A-86  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
Q
delete [zone_set]  
Deletes the zone set given by [zone_set]. If the specified zone set is active, the  
command is suspended until the zone set is deactivated. This keyword requires a  
Zoning Edit session.  
list  
Displays a list of all zone sets. This keyword is available with User authority and  
does not require a Zoning Edit session.  
remove [zone_set] [zone_list]  
Removes a list of zones given by [zone_list] from the zone set given by  
[zone_set]. Zone names are delimited by spaces in [zone_list]. If [zone_set] is the  
active zone set, the zone will not be removed until the zone set has been  
deactivated. This keyword requires a Zoning Edit session.  
rename [zone_set_old] [zone_set_new]  
Renames the zone set given by [zone_set_old] to the name given by  
[zone_set_new]. You can rename the active zone set. This keyword requires a  
Zoning Edit session.  
zones [zone_set]  
Displays all zones that are members of the zone set given by [zone_set]. This  
keyword is available with User authority and does not need a Zoning Edit session.  
Notes  
„
„
„
A zone set must be active for its definitions to be applied to the fabric.  
Only one zone set can be active at one time.  
A zone can be a member of more than one zone set.  
Examples The following is an example of the Zoneset Active command:  
SANbox2 #> zoneset active  
ActiveZoneSet  
Bets  
LastActivatedBy admin@OB-session6  
LastActivatedOn day month date time year  
The following is an example of the Zoneset List command:  
SANbox2 #> zoneset list  
Current List of ZoneSets  
------------------------  
alpha  
beta  
59048-02 A  
A-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoneset Command  
Q
The following is an example of the Zoneset Zones command:  
SANbox2 #> zoneset zones ssss  
Current List of Zones for ZoneSet: ssss  
----------------------------------  
zone1  
zone2  
zone3  
A-88  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
Q
Zoning Command  
Opens a Zoning Edit session in which to create and manage zone sets and zones.  
Refer to the ”Zone Command” on page A-82 and the ”Zoneset Command” on  
page A-86.  
Authority  
Syntax  
Admin. The List keyword is available with User authority.  
zoning  
active  
cancel  
clear  
edit  
history  
limits  
list  
restore  
save  
Keywords active  
Displays membership information for the active zone set including member zones  
and zone members.  
cancel  
Closes the current Zoning Edit session. Any unsaved changes are lost.  
clear  
Clears all inactive zone sets from the volatile edit copy of the zoning database.  
This keyword does not affect the non-volatile zoning database. However, if you  
enter the Zoning Clear command followed by the Zoning Save command, the non-  
volatile zoning database will be cleared from the switch.  
Note:  
The preferred method for clearing the zoning database from the switch  
is the Reset Zoning command.  
edit  
Opens a Zoning Edit session.  
history  
Displays a history of zoning modifications including the following:  
„
„
„
Time of the most recent zone set activation or deactivation and the user who  
performed it  
Time of the most recent modifications to the zoning database and the user  
who made them.  
Checksum for the zoning database  
59048-02 A  
A-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
Q
limits  
Displays the number of zone sets, zones, aliases, members per zone, members  
per alias, and total members in the zoning database. This keyword also displays  
the zoning database limits.  
list  
Lists all fabric zoning definitions. This keyword is available with User authority.  
restore  
Reverts the changes to the zoning database that have been made during the  
current Zoning Edit session since the last Zoning Save command was entered.  
save  
Saves changes made during the current Zoning Edit session. The system will  
inform you that the zone set must be activated to implement any changes. This  
does not apply if you entered the Zoning Clear command during the Zoning Edit  
session.  
Examples The following is an example of the Zoning Edit command:  
SANbox2 #> admin start  
SANbox2 (admin) #> zoning edit  
SANbox2 (admin-zoning) #>  
.
.
SANbox2 (admin-zoning) #> zoning cancel  
Zoning edit mode will be canceled. Please confirm (y/n): [n]  
SANbox2 (admin) #> admin end  
y
The following is an example of the Zoning Limits command:  
SANbox2 #> zoning limits  
Zoning Attribute  
----------------  
MaxZoneSets  
Maximum  
-------  
256  
Current  
[Name]  
------  
-------  
6
MaxZones  
256  
19  
1
MaxAliases  
256  
MaxTotalMembers  
MaxZonesInZoneSets  
MaxMembersPerZone  
6000  
1000  
2000  
166  
19  
10  
23  
9
D_1_JBOD_1  
D_1_Photons  
D_2_JBOD1  
A-90  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
Q
16  
5
D_2_NewJBOD_2  
E1JBOD1  
5
E2JBOD2  
3
LinkResetZone  
3
LinkResetZone2  
NewJBOD1  
8
8
NewJBOD2  
12  
12  
8
Q_1Photon1  
Q_2Photon2  
Q_1_NewJBOD1  
Q_1_Photon_1  
Q_2_NewJBOD2  
Q_2_Photon_2  
ZoneAlias  
13  
8
13  
3
3
ZoneDomainPort  
ZoneFCAddr  
4
MaxMembersPerAlias  
2000  
2
AliasInAZone  
The following is an example of the Zoning List command:  
SANbox2 #> zoning list  
Active ZoneSet Information  
ZoneSet  
Zone  
ZoneMember  
--------------------------------  
wwn  
wwn_b0241f  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16  
59048-02 A  
A-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A – Command Line Interface  
Zoning Command  
Q
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:c3  
Configured Zoning Information  
ZoneSet  
Zone  
ZoneMember  
--------------------------------  
wwn  
wwn_b0241f  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
21:00:00:e0:8b:02:41:2f  
wwn_23bd31  
wwn_221416  
wwn_2215c3  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:23:bd:31  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:14:16  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:c2  
50:06:04:82:bf:d2:18:d2  
10:00:00:00:c9:22:15:  
A-92  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Graphing Port Performance  
SANsurfer Fabric View is an optional application that displays port performance  
using graphs. SANsurfer Fabric View plots data communication rates and total  
errors for selected ports as shown in Figure B-1. When graphing data  
communication rates, you can choose either frames/second or KB/second.  
Figure B-1. Fabric View Graphs  
This appendix describes how to do the following:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Start SANsurfer Fabric View  
Exit SANsurfer Fabric View  
Save and Open SANsurfer Fabric View Default Fabric View Files  
Change the SANsurfer Fabric View Default Fabric File Password  
Set SANsurfer Fabric View preferences  
Set the polling frequency  
Display graphs  
Print graphs  
Save graph statistics to a file  
59048-02 A  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Starting SANsurfer Fabric View  
Q
B.1  
Starting SANsurfer Fabric View  
To start SANsurfer Fabric View from within SANbox Manager, open the topology  
display and select Start Fabric View from the Fabric menu.  
B.2  
Exiting SANsurfer Fabric View  
To exit a SANsurfer Fabric View session, open the File menu and select Exit. If  
you have made changes to the view, the Save Default Fabric File dialog, shown in  
Figure B-2, prompts you to save the view as the default fabric view file. A fabric  
view file contains the set of fabrics that have been added and the graphs that have  
been opened during a SANsurfer Fabric View session. You may also enter a  
password with which to protect the default fabric view file, but a password is not  
required. Refer to ”Changing the SANsurfer Fabric View Default Fabric File  
Password” on page B-4 for information about changing this password. Choose  
one of the following:  
„
Enter a password in the Default File Password field or leave it blank and  
choose the Save View File button. This saves the default fabric view file in  
the working directory.  
„
„
Choose the Exit Without Saving button to exit the application without  
saving the current fabrics to the default fabric view file.  
Choose the Cancel Exit button to cancel the exit operation.  
Figure B-2. Save Default Fabric File – SANsurfer Fabric View  
B-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Saving and Opening SANsurfer Fabric View Fabric View Files  
Q
In your next SANsurfer Fabric View session, the Load Default Fabric File dialog  
shown in Figure B-3 prompts you to load the default fabric view file and to specify  
its password if there is one.  
Figure B-3. Load Default Fabric File – SANsurfer Fabric View  
To prevent SANsurfer Fabric View from prompting you to load and save the  
default fabric view file between sessions, set the Auto Load and Save Graphing  
Options setting to Disable (Enable is the default). Refer to ”Setting SANsurfer  
Fabric View Preferences” on page B-4 for more information.  
B.3  
Saving and Opening SANsurfer Fabric View Fabric View Files  
In addition to the SANsurfer Fabric View default fabric view file, you can save and  
open your own fabric view files. The fabric view file contains the set of fabrics,  
graphs, and graphing options. To save a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Open the File menu and select Save View As to open the Save View dialog.  
Enter a name for the fabric file or choose the Browse button to select an  
existing file. Files are saved in the working directory.  
3.  
Enter a password. When you attempt to open this fabric file, you will be  
prompted for this password. If you leave the File Password field blank, no  
password is required.  
To open a fabric view file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Open View File to open the Open View  
dialog.  
2.  
Enter a name for the fabric file or choose the Browse button to select an  
existing file.  
59048-02 A  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Changing the SANsurfer Fabric View Default Fabric File Password  
Q
B.4  
Changing the SANsurfer Fabric View Default Fabric File Password  
To change the password for the default fabric file, do the following:  
1.  
Open the File menu and select Change Default File Password to open the  
Set New Password dialog as shown in Figure B-4.  
Figure B-4. Set New Password – SANsurfer Fabric View Fabric File  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Enter the new password in the Default File Password field.  
Re-enter the same password in the Re-enter Password to Confirm field.  
Choose the OK button to save the changes.  
B.5  
Setting SANsurfer Fabric View Preferences  
To set preferences, open the File menu and select Preferences to open the  
Preferences dialog shown in Figure B-5. Set the following preferences and  
choose the OK button to save the changes:  
„
„
„
Change the location of the working directory in which to save files  
Change the location of the browser used to view the online help.  
Enable or disable the Auto Load and Auto Save Graphing Options  
preference. When enabled, SANsurfer Fabric View prompts you to save and  
load the default fabric file between sessions. Refer to ”Exiting SANsurfer  
Fabric View” on page B-2 for more information on the default fabric view file.  
Figure B-5. Preferences – SANsurfer Fabric View  
B-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Setting the Polling Frequency  
Q
B.6  
Setting the Polling Frequency  
Fabric View updates the graphs once per second by default. To change this  
polling frequency, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Open the Graph menu, and select Set Polling Frequency to open the Set  
Graph Polling Frequency dialog.  
Enter the new polling interval in seconds [1–60]. Fabric View will update the  
graphs once during the interval.  
Choose the OK button to save the changes.  
B.7  
Displaying Graphs  
To display graphs, do the following:  
1.  
Open the Fabric menu and select Add Fabric or click the Add button. Enter  
a fabric name and an IP address in the Add a New Fabric window. Include  
an account name and a password if required.  
2.  
Set the graphing options and polling frequency. By default, SANsurfer Fabric  
View plots total bytes transmitted and received at a polling frequency of once  
per second. Refer to ”Customizing Graphs” on page B-6 for information  
about changing what is plotted and how it is plotted.  
3.  
4.  
You can display graphs in the following ways:  
„
„
Click on a switch entry handle and select one or more ports.  
Right click on a switch icon in the fabric tree and select Open Graph  
for All Ports on Switch or Open Graph for All Logged-In Ports on  
Switch from the pull-down menu.  
You can move graphs around individually by clicking and dragging, or you  
can arrange them as a group. Refer to ”Arranging Graphs in the Display” on  
page B-6 for more information.  
To remove a graph, click the graph Close button. To remove all graphs, open the  
View menu and select Close All Graphs.  
To remove a fabric and its graphs, select the fabric in the fabric tree, then select  
Remove Fabric from the Fabric menu. You can also right click on a fabric and  
select Remove Fabric for the popup menu.  
Right clicking on a graph opens a popup menu from which you can change graph  
options, print a graph, or save the graph statistics to a file.  
59048-02 A  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Displaying Graphs  
Q
B.7.1  
Arranging Graphs in the Display  
To arrange and size graphs in the display, open the Window menu and select  
Cascade, Tile, or Close All.  
„
„
„
Cascade overlaps the graphs so that all graphs are at least partially visible.  
Tile arranges the graphs in non-overlapping rows and columns.  
Close All closes all graphs.  
You can also click a graph on the Window menu to bring that graph to the front.  
B.7.2  
Customizing Graphs  
You can customize the graph polling frequency, what is plotted in the graphs, and  
the graph color scheme. To set the polling frequency for all graphs, open the  
Graph menu and select Set Polling Frequency.... Enter an interval in seconds  
(0–60) in the dialog box and choose the OK button.  
To choose what is to be plotted, open the Graph menu and select Modify Graph  
Options.... You can also right click on a graph and select Change Graph  
Options. This opens the Default Graph Options dialog shown in Figure B-6.  
Figure B-6. Default Graph Options Dialog  
B-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Printing Graphs  
Q
To modify the graph options, do the following:  
1.  
Choose the units for the graph:  
„
Select the Show Bytes Data on Graph check box to plot data in  
KBytes/second  
„
Select the Show Frames Data on Graph check box to plot data in  
frames/second.  
2.  
Choose what data type to plot. For example, if you selected Show Frames  
Data on Graph in step 1, you can plot one or all of the following:  
„
„
„
Total frames transmitted and received (Total Frames)  
Total frames transmitted (Total Tx Frames)  
Total frames received (Total Rx Frames)  
In addition to these, you can also plot total errors by selecting the Total  
Errors check box.  
3.  
4.  
Display or hide the unit grid. Select the Display Grid on Graph check box to  
display the unit grid.  
Choose the color scheme for the graph. You can select the color for each  
data type, the unit grid, and the background by clicking the corresponding  
color field or button. In each case, you can choose a color using the  
swatches, Red-Green-Blue (RGB), or Hue-Saturation-Brightness (HSB)  
method.  
„
„
Swatches – Click the Swatches tab. Select a swatch from the palette.  
HSB – Click the HSB tab. Select a color using any of the following  
methods:  
‰
‰
Click in the color palette.  
Select the H, S, or B button and use the slide to vary the selected  
value.  
‰
Enter values in the H, S, or B input fields.  
„
RGB – Click the RGB tab. Select a color by moving the slides to adjust  
the values for red, blue, and green; or enter values in the input fields.  
5.  
6.  
Specify the scope for which the changes are to apply. Choose the  
corresponding radio button to apply changes to all graphs, selected graphs,  
or new graphs.  
Choose the OK button.  
B.8  
Printing Graphs  
To print a graph, select a graph, then open the File menu and select Print Graph  
Window. You can also right click on a graph and select Print Graph Window  
from the popup menu.  
59048-02 A  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B – Graphing Port Performance  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File  
Q
B.9  
Saving Graph Statistics to a File  
Statistics for one or all graphs can be saved to a file that can be opened with a  
spreadsheet application. To save a graph statistics file, do the following:  
1.  
2.  
Select a graph.  
Open the File menu, and select Save Current Graph Statistics to a File to  
save the selected graph or select Save All Graph Statistics to a File. You  
can also right click on a graph and select Save Statistics to File.  
3.  
4.  
In the Save window, enter a path name for the file. By default, the file is  
saved in the working directory.  
Choose the Save button.  
B-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
Access Control List Zone  
Arbitrated Loop  
Access Control List zoning divides the  
fabric for purposes of controlling discovery  
and inbound traffic.  
A Fibre Channel topology where ports use  
arbitration to establish a point-to-point  
circuit.  
Active Zone Set  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA)  
The zone set that defines the current  
zoning for the fabric.  
A unique one-byte value assigned during  
loop initialization to each NL_Port on a  
loop.  
Active Firmware  
ASIC  
The firmware image on the switch that is in  
use.  
Application Specific Integrated Circuit  
Activity LED  
Auto Save  
A port LED that indicates when frames are  
entering or leaving the port.  
Zoning parameter that determines whether  
changes to the active zone set that a  
switch receives from other switches in the  
fabric will be saved to permanent memory  
on that switch.  
Administrative State  
State that determines the operating state  
of the port, I/O blade, or switch. The  
configured administrative state is stored in  
the switch configuration. The configured  
administrative state can be temporarily  
overridden using the command line  
interface.  
BootP  
A type of network server.  
Buffer Credit  
A measure of port buffer capacity equal to  
one frame.  
Alarm  
A message generated by the switch that  
specifically requests attention. Alarms are  
generated by several switch processes.  
Some alarms can be configured.  
Cascade Topology  
A fabric in which the switches are  
connected in series. If you connect the last  
switch back to the first switch, you create a  
cascade-with-a-loop topology.  
Alias  
A named set of ports or devices. An alias  
is not a zone, and can not have a zone or  
another alias as a member.  
Class 2 Service  
A service which multiplexes frames at  
frame boundaries to or from one or more  
N_Ports wit h acknowledgment provided.  
AL_PA  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address  
59048-02 A  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
Class 3 Service  
Fabric View File  
A service which multiplexes frames at  
frame boundaries to or from one or more  
N_Ports without acknowledgment.  
A file containing a set of fabrics that were  
opened and saved during a previous  
SANbox Manager session.  
Configured Zone Sets  
Fan Fail LED  
The zone sets stored on a switch  
excluding the active zone set.  
An LED that indicates that a cooling fan in  
the switch is operating below standard.  
Default Visibility  
FC-PLDA  
Zoning parameter that determines the  
level of communication among ports/  
devices when there is no active zone set.  
Fibre Channel Private Loop Direct Attach  
Flash Memory  
Memory on the switch that contains the  
chassis control firmware.  
Domain ID  
User defined number that identifies the  
switch in the fabric.  
Frame  
Data unit consisting of a start-of-frame  
(SOF) delimiter, header, data payload,  
CRC, and an end-of-frame (EOF)  
delimiter.  
Event Log  
Log of messages describing events that  
occur in the fabric.  
Expansion Port  
FRU  
E_Port that connects to another FC-SW-2  
compliant switch.  
Field Replaceable Unit  
Heartbeat LED  
Fabric Database  
A chassis LED that indicates the status of  
the internal switch processor and the  
results of the Power-On Self-Test.  
The set of fabrics that have been opened  
during a SANbox Manager session.  
Fabric Management Switch  
Inactive Firmware  
The switch through which the fabric is  
managed.  
The firmware image on the switch that is  
not in use.  
Fabric Name  
Inband Management  
User defined name associated with the file  
that contains user list data for the fabric.  
The ability to manage a switch through  
another switch over an inter-switch link.  
Fabric Port  
Initiator  
An F_Port or FL_Port.  
The device that initiates a data exchange  
with a target device.  
Glossary-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
In-Order-Delivery  
Mesh Topology  
A feature that requires that frames be  
received in the same order in which they  
were sent.  
A fabric in which each chassis has at least  
one port directly connected to each other  
chassis in the fabric.  
Input Power LED  
MIB  
A chassis LED that indicates that the  
switch logic circuitry is receiving proper DC  
voltages.  
Management Information Base  
Multistage Topology  
A fabric in which two or more edge  
switches connect to one or more core  
switches.  
Inter-Switch Link  
The connection between two switches  
using E_Ports.  
NL_Port  
I/O Blade  
Node Loop Port. A Fibre Channel device  
port that supports arbitrated loop protocol.  
Fibre Channel component of the  
SANbox2-64 switch.  
N_Port  
IP  
Node Port. A Fibre Channel device port in  
a point-to-point or fabric connection.  
Internet Protocol  
LIP  
Output Power LED  
Loop Initialization Primitive sequence  
A power supply LED that indicates that the  
power supply is providing DC voltage to  
the switch. Applies only to SANbox2-16  
and SANbox2-64 switches.  
Logged-In LED  
A port LED on SANbox2-8c and SANbox2-  
16 switches that indicates device login or  
loop initialization status.  
Over Temperature LED  
A chassis LED or a power supply LED that  
indicates that the switch or power supply is  
overheating.  
Maintenance Mode  
Maintenance mode sets the IP address to  
10.0.0.1 and provides access to the switch  
for maintenance purposes.  
Pending Firmware  
The firmware image that will be activated  
upon the next switch reset.  
Management Information Base  
A set of guidelines and definitions for  
SNMP functions.  
Port Status LED  
A dual-function port LED on a SANbox2-  
64 switch that indicates device login or  
loop initialization status, and port activity.  
Management Workstation  
PC workstation that manages the fabric  
through the fabric management switch.  
POST  
Power On Self Test  
Glossary-3  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
Power On Self Test (POST)  
Translated Loop Port  
Diagnostics that the switch chassis  
performs at start up.  
A TL_Port supports a loop of up 124  
private target devices with the ability to  
communicate with up to 63 “off-loop”  
public devices.  
Principal Switch  
The switch in the fabric that manages  
domain ID assignments.  
User Account  
An object stored on a switch that consists  
of an account name, password, authority  
level, and expiration date.  
Private Device  
A device that can communicate only with  
other devices on the same loop.  
VCCI  
Private Loop  
Voluntary Control Council for Interference  
A loop of private devices connected to a  
single switch port.  
Virtual Private Fabric Zone  
Virtual Private Fabric zoning divides the  
fabric for purposes of controlling discovery  
and both inbound and outbound traffic.  
SANbox Manager  
Switch management application.  
Worldwide Name (WWN)  
SFP  
A unique 64-bit address assigned to a  
device by the device manufacturer.  
Small Form-Factor Pluggable.  
Small Form-Factor Pluggable  
WWN  
A transceiver device, smaller than a  
GigaBit Interface Converter, that plugs into  
the Fibre Channel port.  
Worldwide Name  
Zone  
SNMP  
A set of ports or devices grouped together  
to control the exchange of information.  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Zone Set  
Soft Zone  
A set of zones grouped together. The  
active zone set defines the zoning for a  
fabric.  
Soft zoning divides the fabric for purposes  
of controlling discovery. Members of the  
same soft zone automatically discover and  
communicate freely with all other  
Zoning Database  
members of the same zone.  
The set of zone sets, zones, and aliases  
stored on a switch.  
Target  
A storage device that responds to an  
initiator device.  
Glossary-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
zoning configuration 3-17  
A
access control list zone 3-15, 3-28  
account name 3-1, 3-3, A-1, A-81  
active  
B
beacon A-30  
blade  
firmware 4-26  
administrative state 5-2, A-30  
configuration A-32  
configuration display A-64  
description 5-1  
display A-50  
insert 5-3  
zone set 3-12, 3-16, 4-17  
Active Zoneset data window 3-12  
Admin authority 3-1, A-3  
Admin command A-4  
administrative state  
blade 5-2, A-30  
numbering 2-22  
remove 5-4  
replace 5-3  
reset 5-3, A-25  
selecting 2-23  
configured 4-16, 5-2, 6-10  
current 4-16, 5-2, 6-10  
I/O blade 5-2  
port 6-10, A-45  
switch 4-16, A-31  
alarm  
test A-75  
Blade Information data window 5-1  
BootP boot method 4-20  
broadcast 4-17, A-50  
browser  
configuration 4-11, A-36  
configuration display A-64  
log A-30, A-50  
alias  
location 2-11, B-4  
requirement 2-1  
add members 3-29, A-5  
copy A-5  
create 3-28, A-5  
delete A-5  
C
delete members A-6  
description 3-16  
display list A-5  
display members A-6  
remove 3-29  
rename A-6  
Alias command A-5  
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address A-45  
archive configuration 4-23  
authentication  
CD-ROM drive 2-1  
chassis status A-50, A-51  
Command Line Interface A-1  
command syntax A-2  
commands A-3  
Config command A-7  
configuration  
activate A-7  
archive 4-23  
backup A-7  
trap 4-21  
copy A-7  
user 3-1  
delete A-7  
auto save  
edit A-7  
default fabric view file 2-11  
graphing options B-4  
list A-7  
reset A-25  
59048-02 A  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
restore 4-24, A-8  
save A-8  
donor port 6-2, 6-12, 6-13, A-51  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 4-20  
configured administrative state 4-16  
contact 4-21  
E
CRC error 4-11  
credits 6-13  
E_Port  
isolation 3-19, 4-16  
self-discovery 6-12  
Error Detect Timeout 4-18  
Ethernet port 2-1  
event browser  
current administrative state 4-16  
D
data window  
Active Zoneset 3-12  
Blade Information 5-1  
Configured Zonesets 4-10  
description 2-18, 2-21, 2-24  
Name Server 4-6, 6-8  
port information 6-7  
port statistics 6-4  
switch 4-6  
display 3-9  
filter 3-11  
preference 2-11  
save to file 3-12  
sort 3-12  
event logging  
by component A-42, A-67  
by port A-43, A-67  
by severity level A-67  
display A-67  
database  
fabric 3-3  
zoning 3-20  
date 4-13  
Date command A-11  
Decode error 4-11  
default  
restore defaults A-43  
save settings A-44  
settings A-67  
severity level A-43  
start A-44  
configuration 4-27  
user account 3-1  
visibility 3-18, 3-23  
zoning 3-18  
stop A-44  
event severity 3-10  
expansion port 6-2  
external test 6-15, A-75  
default fabric view file  
auto save 2-11  
SANbox Manager 2-11  
device  
login monitoring 4-11  
logout monitoring 4-11  
scan 6-13  
disk space 2-1  
distance 6-13  
domain ID  
F
F_Port 6-2, 6-12  
fabric  
add 3-3  
add a switch 3-5  
database 3-3  
delete 3-4  
discovery interval 2-11  
displaying information 3-7  
loop port 6-2, 6-12  
management 3-1  
merge 3-18  
conflict 3-15  
description 4-16  
lock 4-16  
domains A-51  
port 6-2, 6-12  
Index-2  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
rediscovery 3-5  
security 3-1  
status 3-7  
tree 2-17  
zoning 3-13  
G
G_Port 6-2  
gateway address 4-20  
generic  
loop port 6-2, 6-12  
port 6-2, 6-12  
GL_Port 6-2  
Fabric View  
arrange graphs B-6  
customize graphs B-6  
display graphs B-5  
preferences B-4  
start B-2  
fabric view file B-3  
auto save B-4  
open 3-4, B-3  
password B-2  
save 2-10, 3-4  
graphic window 2-18  
H
hard reset 4-14  
Hardreset command A-13  
help 2-12  
Help command A-14  
History command A-15  
hot reset 4-14  
Hot Swap Wizard 5-3  
Hotreset command A-16  
Hotswap command A-17  
faceplate display  
data window 2-24  
description 2-12, 2-22  
open 2-21  
popup menu 2-24  
factory defaults 4-27, A-25  
Fallback command A-12  
FC-4 descriptor 6-13  
FC-SW-2 compliance 4-17  
firmware  
I
I/O blade  
change state 5-2  
configuration A-32  
description 5-1  
display information 5-1  
insert 5-3  
activate pending 4-27  
active 4-26  
numbering 2-22  
remove 5-4  
change pending 4-27  
fallback 4-27  
replace 5-3  
reset 5-3, A-25  
image file 4-26, A-19  
inactive 4-26  
selecting 2-23  
testing 5-2  
install with SANbox Manager 4-26  
list image files A-19  
non-disruptive activation 4-26, A-16  
pending 4-26, A-12  
remove image files A-19  
retrieve image file A-19  
unpack image A-19  
version A-55  
I/O Steam Guard 6-13  
Image command A-19  
inactive firmware 4-26  
inband management 3-2, 4-17  
Initial Start Dialog 2-11  
internal test 6-15, A-75  
inter-switch link security 3-2  
IP  
FL_Port 6-2, 6-12  
address 4-20  
configuration 4-20  
59048-02 A  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
ISL monitoring 4-11  
network  
configuration reset A-26  
discovery 4-20  
L
interfaces A-51  
properties 4-19  
node-to-node test 6-16  
non-disruptive activation 4-26, 4-27, A-16  
layout 2-20  
legacy address format 4-18  
link  
delete 3-7  
selecting 2-20  
state database A-51  
status 2-19  
O
online  
Link data window 4-9  
Lip command A-20  
log  
archive A-42  
clear A-42  
help 2-12  
test 6-16  
online test A-75  
operating systems 2-1  
orphan zone set 3-16  
event A-42, A-67  
power-on self test A-54  
logged in users A-55  
login limit 3-4, A-1  
loop port A-20  
fabric 6-12  
generic 6-2, 6-12  
translated 6-12  
Loop Port Bypass A-45  
Loop Port Enable A-45  
loopback test 6-15  
loss of signal monitoring 4-11  
P
page break A-31  
Passwd command A-21  
password  
change A-21  
default fabric view file 2-10, B-4  
switch 3-1, 3-3, A-21  
user account 4-4, A-1  
pending firmware 4-26, 4-27  
performance graphs B-5  
Ping command A-22  
popup menu 2-21, 2-24  
port  
M
management workstation 2-1  
manufacturer information A-71  
media status 6-4  
memory  
activity A-51  
administrative state 6-10, A-45  
buffer credits 6-12, 6-13  
configuration 6-9, A-32  
configuration display A-64  
counters A-45  
workstation 2-1  
menu structure 2-13  
displaying information 6-1  
donor 6-13  
extending credits 6-13  
external test A-75  
N
initialize A-25  
internal test A-75  
loopback test A-75  
mode 6-2, 6-11  
numbering 2-22  
name server  
display A-51  
export 4-13  
zone 3-14  
Name Server data window 4-6, 6-8  
Index-4  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
online test A-75  
operational information A-52  
operational state 6-3  
performance A-52, A-69, B-1  
recipient 6-13  
reset 6-14  
selecting 2-23  
speed 6-3, 6-11, A-45  
status 2-23  
test 6-15  
S
SANbox Manager  
default fabric file 2-8  
exit 2-8  
preferences 2-11, B-4  
starting 2-6  
uninstall 2-9  
user interface 2-12  
version 2-12  
SANbox Manager installation  
Linux 2-3, 2-5  
view 2-11, 2-23  
Port Information data window 4-9, 6-7  
Port Statistics data window 4-9, 6-4  
port/device tree 3-20  
power on self test log A-54  
preferences  
Solaris 2-4, 2-5  
Windows 2-2, 2-5  
SANbox2-16 switch 3-8  
SANbox2-64 switch 3-8  
SANbox2-8c switch 3-8  
scan device 6-13  
Fabric View B-4  
SANbox Manager 2-11  
principal switch 4-16  
processor 2-1  
properties  
network 4-19  
security  
fabric 3-1  
inband management 3-2  
inter-switch link 3-2  
SerDes level test 6-15  
serial port 2-1  
Set command A-30  
Set Config command A-32  
Set Log command A-42  
Set Port command A-45  
Set Setup command A-46  
severity levels 3-10  
SFP level test 6-15  
shortcut keys 2-15  
port 6-9  
Ps command A-23  
Q
Quit command A-24  
R
read community 4-21  
receive buffer 6-12  
Show command A-50  
Show Config command A-64  
Show Log command A-67  
Show Perf command A-69  
Show Setup command A-71  
Shutdown command A-74  
recipient port 6-13  
refresh 3-7, 4-5  
Registered State Control Notification 6-13  
remote logging 4-22  
reset  
with POST 4-14  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
configuration 4-21, A-46  
configuration display A-71  
proxy 4-21  
without POST 4-14  
Reset command A-25  
Resource Allocation Timeout 4-18  
restore configuration 4-24  
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol 4-20  
reset A-25  
trap configuration 4-22  
59048-02 A  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
slot number 2-22, A-54  
soft zone 3-14, 3-28  
static boot method 4-20  
status icon color 2-17  
steering A-54  
subnet mask address 4-20  
switch  
add 3-5  
administrative state 4-16, A-31  
configuration 4-14, A-35  
configuration display A-64  
delete 3-7  
displaying information 4-5  
hard reset 4-14, A-13  
hot reset 4-14  
tool bar  
standard 2-16  
zoning 3-21  
topology display  
arrange icons 2-20  
data windows 2-21  
description 2-12, 2-19  
transceiver status 6-4  
translated loop port 6-2, 6-12  
transmission speed 6-11  
trap  
authentication 4-21  
community 4-21  
configuration 4-22  
SNMP version 4-22  
icons 3-8  
location 4-21  
U
manufacturer information A-71  
operational information A-55  
paging 4-13  
properties 4-15  
replace 3-6  
Uptime command A-78  
user  
authentication 3-1  
authority A-3  
logged in A-55  
user account  
create 4-2  
reset A-78  
reset without POST 4-14, A-25  
restore factory defaults 4-27  
selecting 2-20  
default 4-1  
description A-1  
password 4-4  
remove 4-3  
status 2-19  
Switch data window 4-6  
symbolic name 4-16  
syslog 4-22  
User command A-79  
system configuration  
change A-47  
display A-71  
V
version 2-12  
View File Auto Save and Load 2-8  
virtual private fabric zone 3-15, 3-28  
T
temperature A-50  
Test command A-75  
testing  
W
Whoami command A-81  
working  
directory 2-11, B-4  
status indicator 2-18  
write community 4-21  
I/O blade 5-2  
port loopback 6-15  
time 4-13, A-11  
timeout values 4-18  
TL_Port 6-2, 6-12  
Index-6  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
Zoneset command A-86  
zoning  
configuration 3-17, A-37  
configuration display A-64  
database 3-16, 3-20, 4-17, A-26  
default 3-18  
edit A-89  
history A-89  
limits A-90  
list definitions A-90  
remove all 3-24  
Z
zone  
access control list 3-15  
add member port 3-26, A-82  
copy 3-23, A-82  
create 3-25, A-82  
definition 3-14  
delete A-82  
delete member port A-83  
list A-83  
list members A-83  
name server 3-14  
remove 3-23, 3-27  
remove all 3-27  
revert changes A-90  
save edits A-90  
Zoning command A-89  
remove member port 3-27  
rename 3-27, A-83  
soft 3-14  
type 3-28, A-83  
virtual private fabric 3-15  
Zone command A-82  
zone merge  
description 3-18  
failure 3-19  
failure recovery 3-19  
zone set  
activate 3-23, A-86  
active 3-12, 3-16, A-89  
add member zone A-86  
copy A-86  
create 3-22, A-86  
deactivate 3-23, A-26, A-86  
definition 3-16  
delete A-87  
delete member zone 3-23, A-87  
display A-87  
display active A-86  
display members A-87  
display zones A-83  
management 3-22  
orphan 3-16  
remove 3-24  
rename 3-27, A-87  
tree 3-20  
59048-02 A  
Index-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SANbox2-64 Switch Management  
User’s Guide  
Q
Notes  
Index-8  
59048-02 A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Speaker PRO LX7 User Guide
RCA Flat Panel Television RLCVD1924 User Guide
Renesas Network Card PCA7426G02 User Guide
Rosewill Computer Keyboard RK 7310 User Guide
Rotel Stereo Amplifier RB1090 User Guide
Samsung Home Security System SCV 2080 User Guide
Samsung Microwave Oven AMW612W ST User Guide
Samsung Thermometer TSR 301S User Guide
Scag Power Equipment Lawn Mower ST 18B Tractor User Guide
Seagate Flat Panel Television ST12450W WD User Guide